WO2019128949A1 - Method and device for transmitting data transmission format - Google Patents

Method and device for transmitting data transmission format Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019128949A1
WO2019128949A1 PCT/CN2018/123286 CN2018123286W WO2019128949A1 WO 2019128949 A1 WO2019128949 A1 WO 2019128949A1 CN 2018123286 W CN2018123286 W CN 2018123286W WO 2019128949 A1 WO2019128949 A1 WO 2019128949A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
indication information
system parameter
terminal device
access network
network device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2018/123286
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
郑娟
官磊
马莎
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019128949A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019128949A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0006Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission format
    • H04L1/0007Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission format by modifying the frame length
    • H04L1/0008Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission format by modifying the frame length by supplementing frame payload, e.g. with padding bits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0078Avoidance of errors by organising the transmitted data in a format specifically designed to deal with errors, e.g. location
    • H04L1/0079Formats for control data
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and apparatus for transmitting a data transmission format.
  • each device needs to use frequency resources for information transmission, and the frequency resources are also referred to as spectrum or frequency bands.
  • the frequency band can be divided into a licensed frequency band and an unlicensed frequency band, and the unlicensed frequency band is also called an unlicensed frequency band.
  • the licensed band is a frequency resource exclusive to some operators.
  • the unlicensed band is a common frequency resource in a wireless communication network and can be used free of charge. Different devices can share frequency resources on the unlicensed band.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method and an apparatus for transmitting a data transmission format.
  • a method for transmitting a data transmission format includes: determining, by a terminal device, a first system parameter or a second system parameter used by the terminal device and the access network device for data transmission; Receiving, by the terminal device, the first indication information that is sent by the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a number of time units for sending and/or receiving data by the access network device; Determining, by the first indication information, the number of the time units; wherein, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the time unit The number is an element included in the first set; or, when the terminal device determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is An element included in the two sets; wherein the first set corresponds to the first system parameter, and the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; At least one M value is included in a set, the M is greater than N, the N is a maximum value
  • the access network device can use the first indication information to indicate the sending and/or receiving data, regardless of the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the number of time units which simplifies the indication of data transmission formats (such as SFI).
  • the first set includes a set ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w ⁇
  • the second set includes a set ⁇ b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w ⁇
  • the value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set
  • the ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the data transmission duration corresponding to the multiple time units indicated by the first indication information is in different system parameters. In the case of similar results, this is especially true for data transmission format indications on unlicensed band resources.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device is configured according to the first indication information. Determining, by the first system parameter and the second system parameter, the number of time units; or determining, by the terminal device, the number of the time units according to the first indication information and the second system parameter The length of the transmission.
  • the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units; when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission When the first system parameter is used, the terminal device determines the time according to the first indication information and the first system parameter, or according to the first indication information and the second system parameter. a starting position of the number of units; or, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the second system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device according to the first indication The information and the second system parameter determine a starting position of the number of time units.
  • the terminal device receives second indication information that is sent by the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units;
  • the terminal device determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the terminal device determines the time according to the second indication information and the first system parameter. The start position of the unit; or, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the second system parameter for data transmission, the terminal device according to the second indication information and The second system parameter determines a starting position of the time unit.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
  • the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  • the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration
  • the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the The number of time units in which the network access device transmits and/or receives data within a preset time range, wherein the duration of the preset time range is not greater than the duration of the single data transmission limited by the regulatory band on the unlicensed band resource. . Therefore, the terminal device may not perform downlink detection during the uplink data transmission period that is not scheduled, thereby achieving the power saving effect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method, including: determining, by an access network device, a number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data; and the access network device sending the first to a terminal device Instructing information, the first indication information is used to indicate a number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data; wherein, when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, When the first system parameter is the first system parameter, the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or, when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, when the second system parameter is used, The number of time units is an element included in the second set; wherein the first set corresponds to the first system parameter, and the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; the first The set includes at least one M value, the M is greater than N, the N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the sub corresponding to the first system parameter.
  • the indication of the data transmission format can also achieve that the data transmission duration corresponding to the indicated time unit is comparable regardless of which system parameter is adopted, thereby simplifying the data transmission format indication on the unlicensed band resource.
  • the first set includes a set ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w ⁇
  • the second set includes a set ⁇ b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w ⁇
  • the value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set
  • the ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
  • the access network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
  • the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  • the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration
  • the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the The number of time units in which the network access device transmits and/or receives data within a preset time range, wherein the duration of the preset time range is not greater than the duration of the single data transmission limited by the regulatory band on the unlicensed band resource.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device for performing the method of the first aspect.
  • the terminal device comprises means for performing the method of the first aspect or any one of the implementations of the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an access network device, where the method of the second aspect is performed.
  • the access network device includes means for performing the method in any one of the second aspect or the second aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method, including: determining, by a terminal device, a first system parameter or a second system parameter used by the terminal device and an access network device to perform data transmission;
  • the terminal device receives the indication information sent by the access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data; the terminal device according to the indication Determining a starting position of the number of time units; wherein, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device Determining a starting position of the number of time units according to the indication information and the first system parameter, or according to the indication information and the second system parameter; or when the terminal device determines the terminal When the device and the access network device use the second system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device according to the indication information and the second system Parameters determining the starting position of the number of time units.
  • the number of the time units is in the first set.
  • the first set corresponds to the first system parameter
  • the second set corresponds to the second system parameter
  • the first set includes at least one M value
  • the M is greater than N
  • the N is a maximum value in the second set
  • the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  • the first set includes a set ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w ⁇
  • the second set includes a set ⁇ b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w ⁇
  • the value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set
  • the ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  • the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration; and the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration.
  • the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data within a preset time range, where the preset time is The duration of the range corresponds to no more than a single data transmission duration subject to regulatory restrictions on the unlicensed band resources.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method, including: determining, by an access network device, a starting position of a number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data; and the access network device to the terminal device Sending indication information, the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data.
  • the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or
  • the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the second set; wherein the first set and the first Corresponding to a system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter, the first set includes at least one M value, the M is greater than N, and the N is in the second set The maximum value, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  • the first set includes a set ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w ⁇
  • the second set includes a set ⁇ b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w ⁇
  • the value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set
  • the ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  • the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration; and the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration.
  • the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data within a preset time range, where the preset time is The duration of the range corresponds to no more than a single data transmission duration subject to regulatory restrictions on the unlicensed band resources.
  • the indication information is further used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device for performing the method of the fifth aspect.
  • the terminal device includes means for performing the method in any one of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an access network device, where the method of the sixth aspect is performed.
  • the access network device includes means for performing the method in any one of the sixth aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer storage medium on which a computer program (instruction) is stored, and when the program (instruction) is run on a computer, the computer is caused to perform the first aspect, the second aspect, and the fifth aspect. Or the method described in the sixth aspect.
  • the present application provides a chip system including a processor for supporting an access network device and a terminal device to implement the functions involved in the foregoing aspects, such as, for example, generating or processing the method involved in the foregoing method. Data and / or information.
  • the chip system further comprises a memory for storing the necessary program instructions and data of the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the application provides a communication device including a processor and a memory; the memory is configured to store a computer execution instruction; the processor is configured to execute a computer execution instruction stored by the memory to enable the communication
  • the apparatus performs the method of the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect, or the sixth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication system, comprising the terminal device according to the above third aspect and the access network device of the fourth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication system, comprising the terminal device according to the seventh aspect and the access network device of the eighth aspect.
  • the transmission duration corresponding to multiple time units that are comparable or identical may be used to implement an effective data transmission format. Indicates and simplifies the design of the data transfer format indication.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of different SCSs and corresponding time slot durations according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of another frame provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of indicating a transmission duration according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another indication transmission duration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another indication transmission duration provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the number of time units indicating that the access network device receives data by using the first indication information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another time unit number indicating that an access network device receives data by using the first indication information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another time unit number indicating that an access network device receives data by using the first indication information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a different relationship between a starting position #1 and a starting position #2 according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of another relationship between a starting position #1 and a starting position #2 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing another relationship between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2 provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • One in the embodiment of the present application means a single individual, and does not mean that it can only be one individual, and cannot be applied to other individuals.
  • a terminal device in the embodiment of the present application refers to a certain terminal device, and does not mean that it can be applied to only one specific terminal device.
  • system can be used interchangeably with "network”.
  • references to "one embodiment” (or “an implementation") or “an embodiment” (or “an implementation”) in this application are meant to include the particular features, structures, features, etc. described in connection with the embodiments, in at least one embodiment. . Thus, “in one embodiment” or “in an embodiment” or “an”
  • the terms "and/or” and “at least one” in the case of “A and/or B” and “at least one of A and B” in the embodiment of the present application include any one of three schemes, That is, a scheme including A but not including B, a scheme including B not including A, and a scheme including both options A and B.
  • such a phrase includes any of the six schemes, ie, includes A, but does not include the B and C schemes, including B without A and C, including C but not A and B, including A and B but not C, including B and C but not A
  • the scheme includes the schemes of A and C but not B, and the schemes of all three options A, B and C.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of communication between a wireless device and a wireless communication system.
  • the wireless communication system may be a system that applies various radio access technologies (RATs), such as code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Frequency division multiple access (FDMA), orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA), or single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) and other systems .
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • TDMA time division multiple access
  • FDMA Frequency division multiple access
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency-division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • the wireless communication system may be a long term evolution (LTE) system, a CDMA system, a wideband code division multiple access (wideband CDMA (WCDMA) system, a global system for mobile communications (GSM) system, a wireless local area network ( Wireless local area network (WLAN) system, New Radio (NR) system, various evolved or fused systems, and systems for future-oriented communication technologies.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • CDMA compact code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband CDMA
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • WLAN Wireless local area network
  • NR New Radio
  • a wireless communication system can include any number of network devices as well as terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system may also include one or more core network devices or devices for carrying virtualized network functions, and the like.
  • the access network device 102 can provide services to the wireless device over one or more carriers.
  • the access network device and the terminal device are collectively referred to as a wireless device.
  • the access network device 102 is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide a wireless communication function for a terminal device.
  • the access network device may include various forms of a macro base station (BS), a micro base station (also referred to as a small station), a relay station, or an access point.
  • BS macro base station
  • a micro base station also referred to as a small station
  • a relay station or an access point.
  • the name of a device with radio access capability may be different, for example, in an LTE system, called an evolved Node B (eNB or eNodeB),
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • 3G third generation
  • it Node B
  • it is simply referred to as an access network device, sometimes also referred to as a base station.
  • the wireless devices involved in the embodiments of the present application may include various handheld devices having wireless communication functions, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to the wireless modem.
  • the wireless device may be referred to as a terminal device, and may also be referred to as a mobile station (MS), a terminal, a user equipment (UE), or the like.
  • the wireless device may be a subscriber unit, a cellular phone, a smart phone, a wireless data card, a personal digital assistant (PDA) computer, a tablet computer, a modem ( Modem) or modem processor, handheld, laptop computer, netbook, cordless phone or wireless local loop (WLL) station, Bluetooth device , machine type communication (MTC) terminal, etc.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • Bluetooth device machine type communication
  • the wireless device can support one or more wireless technologies for wireless communication, such as 5G, LTE, WCDMA, CDMA, 1X, Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TS-SCDMA), GSM, 802.11 and more.
  • Wireless devices can also support carrier aggregation techniques.
  • Multiple wireless devices can perform the same or different services. For example, mobile broadband services, Enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) services, and Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication (URLLC) services.
  • eMBB Enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • URLLC Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication
  • the access network device 102 is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the access network device 102 may include a controller or a processor 201 (hereinafter, the processor 201 is taken as an example) and a transceiver 202.
  • Controller/processor 201 is sometimes also referred to as a modem processor.
  • Modem processor 201 can include a baseband processor (BBP) (not shown) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information or data bits conveyed in the signal.
  • BBP baseband processor
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • the transceiver 202 can be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the access network device 102 and the terminal device, and to support radio communication between the terminal devices.
  • the processor 201 can also be used to perform functions of communication between various terminal devices and other network devices.
  • the uplink signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, coordinated by the transceiver 202, and further processed by the processor 201 to recover the traffic data and/or signaling information transmitted by the terminal device.
  • the traffic data and/or signaling messages are processed by the terminal device and modulated by the transceiver 202 to generate a downlink signal and transmitted to the UE via the antenna.
  • the access network device 102 can also include a memory 203 that can be used to store program code and/or data for the access network device 102.
  • the transceiver 202 can include separate receiver and transmitter circuits, or the same circuit can implement transceiving functions.
  • the access network device 102 can also include a communication unit 204 for supporting the access network device 102 to communicate with other network entities. For example, it is used to support the access network device 102 to communicate with a network device or the like of the core network.
  • the access network device may further include a bus.
  • the transceiver 202, the memory 203, and the communication unit 204 can be connected to the processor 201 through a bus.
  • the bus can be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus.
  • PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
  • EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture
  • the bus may include an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a possible structure of a terminal device in the above wireless communication system.
  • the terminal device is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device can be any of the two terminal devices 104.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver 301, an application processor 302, a memory 303, and a modem processor 304.
  • the transceiver 301 can condition (e.g., analog convert, filter, amplify, upconvert, etc.) the output samples and generate an uplink signal that is transmitted via an antenna to the base station described in the above embodiments. On the downlink, the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the access network device. Transceiver 301 can condition (eg, filter, amplify, downconvert, digitize, etc.) the signals received from the antenna and provide input samples.
  • Modem processor 304 also sometimes referred to as a controller or processor, may include a baseband processor (BBP) (not shown) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information conveyed in the signal Or data bits.
  • BBP baseband processor
  • the BBP is typically implemented in one or more numbers within the modem processor 304 or as a separate integrated circuit (IC), as needed or desired.
  • a modem processor 304 may include an encoder 3041, a modulator 3042, a decoder 3043, and a demodulator 3044.
  • the encoder 3041 is for encoding the signal to be transmitted.
  • encoder 3041 can be used to receive traffic data and/or signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink and to process (eg, format, encode, or interleave, etc.) the traffic data and signaling messages.
  • Modulator 3042 is used to modulate the output signal of encoder 3041.
  • the modulator can perform symbol mapping and/or modulation processing on the encoder's output signals (data and/or signaling) and provide output samples.
  • a demodulator 3044 is used to demodulate the input signal.
  • demodulator 3044 processes the input samples and provides symbol estimates.
  • the decoder 3043 is configured to decode the demodulated input signal.
  • the decoder 3043 deinterleaves, and/or decodes the demodulated input signal and outputs the decoded signal (data and/or signaling).
  • Encoder 3041, modulator 3042, demodulator 3044, and decoder 3043 may be implemented by a composite modem processor 304. These units are processed according to the radio access technology employed by the radio access network.
  • Modem processor 304 receives digitized data representative of voice, data or control information from application processor 302 and processes the digitized data for transmission.
  • the associated modem processor can support one or more of a variety of wireless communication protocols of various communication systems, such as LTE, new air interface, Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), high speed packet access (High Speed) Packet Access, HSPA) and more.
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • High Speed Packet Access High Speed Packet Access
  • one or more memories may also be included in the modem processor 304.
  • modem processor 304 and the application processor 302 may be integrated in one processor chip.
  • the memory 303 is used to store program code (sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.) and/or data for supporting communication of the terminal device.
  • program code sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.
  • the memory 203 or the memory 303 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be a processor 201 for storing program code or a storage unit inside the modem processor 304 or the application processor 302, or may Is an external storage unit separate from the processor 201 or the modem processor 304 or the application processor 302, or may also be a storage unit including the processor 201 or the modem processor 304 or the application processor 302 and with the processor 201 or modem
  • the processor 304 or the application processor 302 is a separate component of an external storage unit.
  • the processor 201 and the modem processor 301 may be the same type of processor or different types of processors. For example, it can be implemented in a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), and a field programmable gate array ( Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, other integrated circuit, or any combination thereof.
  • the processor 201 and the modem processor 301 can implement or perform various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor may also be a combination of computing function devices, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, or a system-on-a-chip (SOC) or the like.
  • a radio access network device such as a base station, a wireless local area network access point, and the like, a transmission reception point (TRP), provides access to a licensed device in a licensed frequency band.
  • Unlicensed bands are bands that can be used free of charge, and different devices can share resources on unlicensed bands. Operators can use the unlicensed band resources to achieve the purpose of network capacity offloading, but need to comply with the regulatory requirements of the unlicensed band resources in different geographies and different spectrums.
  • the license target frequency band is a 5 GHz unlicensed frequency band opened by governments.
  • the coexistence specifications include transmission power control (TPC), dynamic frequency selection (DFS), channel occupied bandwidth, and after listening. Said (listen before talk, LBT) and so on.
  • TPC transmission power control
  • DFS dynamic frequency selection
  • LBT listen before talk
  • Wi-Fi wireless fidelity
  • Wi-Fi wireless fidelity
  • One method of competing resources for Wi-Fi communication system applications is the LBT rule.
  • the basic idea of the LBT rule is: Before each communication device sends data on a certain channel, it needs to detect whether the current channel is idle, that is, whether it can detect that the nearby node is occupying the channel to transmit data. This detection process is called idle. Clear channel assessment (CCA). If the communication device detects that the channel is occupied, then the communication device is currently unable to transmit data on the channel.
  • CCA Clear channel assessment
  • the communication device can transmit data, and in general, In order to maintain friendly coexistence with other communication devices, the time for transmitting data on the channel is limited, and within this limited time range, the communication device does not need to perform idle evaluation on the channel; or, at this limited time within the scope, the communication device can also share the unlicensed band resources that are competing with other communication devices. Specifically, the other communication device having a certain relationship with the communication device can use the unlicensed band resource with high priority.
  • other communication devices having a certain relationship with the communication device can be understood as other communication devices served by the communication device. For example, if the communication device is a base station, other communication devices serving with the communication device can be understood as the base station.
  • the terminal device of the service or if the communication device is a terminal device, the other communication device having a certain relationship with the communication device can be understood as the serving base station of the terminal device or other service of the serving base station of the terminal device.
  • User equipment Secondly, here, the high priority uses the unlicensed band resource, which may include other communication devices that can use the unlicensed band resource when the unlicensed band resource is used, and does not need to idle evaluation of the channel, or if idle evaluation is needed, Listening is performed using a high-priority CCA method.
  • the time range of the above limitation is referred to as a maximum channel occupancy time (MCOT).
  • the specific value of the MCOT is related to local regulations or, in addition, to the definition of the standard.
  • MCOT can be 4 ms; according to European regulations, MCOT can be 13 ms or 10 ms; according to the 3rd Generation Partner Project (3GPP) standard protocol, MCOT specific value and LBT
  • the priority value can be 2ms, 4ms, 6ms, 8ms or 10ms; in the 60GHz band, according to European regulations, MCOT can be 9ms.
  • whether the channel is idle or not can be realized by means of signal detection, energy detection, and the like. Specifically, if the detection channel is idle or not, the signal is detected, and accordingly, if a specific signal is not detected (for example, for a Wi-Fi system, the specific signal may be a preamble Preamble), the channel may be considered idle.
  • the detecting device can use the unlicensed frequency band for data transmission; if energy detection is used, if the received or detected energy is below a certain threshold, the channel can be considered as idle, and likewise, at this time, the detecting device Data can be transferred using the unlicensed band.
  • NR new radio
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method. As shown in FIG. 4, the transmission method may be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1.
  • the access network device in the method may be applied to the structure of FIG. Schematically, the terminal device can be applied to the structural diagram of FIG.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is exemplified by the data transmission of the licensed band. However, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the unlicensed band, and the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 401 The terminal device determines a first system parameter or a second system parameter used when the access network device performs data transmission.
  • the first system parameter and the second system parameter are system parameters (numerology) that can be used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, and the system parameters include subcarrier spacing (SCS) in the embodiment of the present application. And/or slot duration.
  • a 5G NR system is a communication system that can support multiple subcarrier spacing SCSs, and the duration or duration of each slot is related to the size of the subcarriers.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is only a 5G NR system, but is not limited to the 5G NR system, and any system supporting multiple system parameters can be applied.
  • Table 1 shows a correspondence table of subcarrier spacings that can be supported and corresponding slot durations in the NR system.
  • the NR system can support at least 6 SCS (kHz), corresponding to 6 different time slot durations (ms).
  • SCS time slot duration
  • ms time slot durations
  • the time slots corresponding to the SCSs of 15 kHz, 30 kHz, and 60 kHz are 1 ms, 0.5 ms, and 0.25 ms, respectively, and the schematic diagrams of the SCSs and corresponding different time slots are as shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the terminal device may determine system parameters used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission by using the following manner.
  • the data transmission here includes control data transmission and/or service data transmission, wherein the system parameters corresponding to the control data transmission and the service data transmission may be the same or different.
  • Pre-set criteria For example, after the terminal device establishes a radio resource control (RRC) link with the access network device, the system parameter corresponding to the synchronization channel and/or the broadcast channel detected when accessing the access network device may be used as the terminal.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the terminal device can determine the system parameters corresponding to the detected synchronization channel and/or the broadcast channel by means of blind detection.
  • the terminal device when accessing the access network device, can determine the system parameters used by the access network device and the terminal device for data transmission through high-level broadcast signaling or user-specific high-level signaling.
  • the high layer broadcast signaling may include signaling transmitted through a broadcast channel, such as control information included in a synchronization signal block (SSB), control information included in remaining minimum system information (RMSI), The control information included in the optional system information (OSI), the control information included in the on-demand system information, and the like are selected.
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • RMSI remaining minimum system information
  • OSI optional system information
  • User-specific higher layer signaling may include, for example, RRC signaling.
  • the physical layer signaling may include signaling sent through a physical layer channel, such as a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • the physical layer signaling may be public physical layer signaling, or may be terminal device specific physical layer signaling, where the terminal device specific physical layer signaling is a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) specific to the terminal device. ) Scrambled signaling.
  • RNTI radio network temporary identifier
  • the MAC signaling may be transmitted through a physical layer data traffic channel, for example, through a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • Step 402 The access network device determines the number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data.
  • the time unit for transmitting and/or receiving data indicates that the access network device sends the data to the terminal device in the time unit, and the terminal device sends the data to the access network device.
  • a time unit can be understood as a time slot in the NR system.
  • time slots are used for description. It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application are not limited thereto, and may be applied to time units of other representations.
  • the access network device determines the number of time slots for transmitting and/or receiving data. It can also be understood that the access network device determines the length of data transmission for transmitting and/or receiving data. This is because, if the duration of the time slot is known or fixed, the access network device determines the number of time slots in which the data is transmitted and/or received, equivalent to the access network device determining the transmission and/or The data transmission duration of the received data, wherein the transmission data transmission duration can also be understood as the downlink data transmission duration or the downlink data transmission period, and the received data transmission duration can also be understood as the uplink data transmission duration or the uplink data transmission period.
  • the access network device can adaptively determine the time period for the downlink data transmission and the uplink data transmission on the unlicensed band according to the uplink and downlink data transmission requirements.
  • the time period in which the access network device is used for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission may be regarded as a frame structure. Since the access network device can adaptively select the frame structure mode, the frame structure on the unlicensed band when the access network device performs data transmission (including transmission and/or reception) is also flexible.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of a frame structure
  • FIG. 7 shows another frame structure diagram.
  • Figure 6 is applicable to service transmissions with multiple uplink data transmissions and less downlink data transmission, for example, if the access network equipment competes for the unlicensed frequency band resources, if the uplink service to be scheduled for transmission (corresponding to uplink data) If the load is large, the access network device can use one slot for downlink data transmission (for example, sending uplink scheduling control information, etc.) within a limited time range, and then the remaining time slots are used for receiving the terminal device. The uplink data sent.
  • Figure 7 is applicable to more dynamic and flexible service transmission.
  • the downlink data transmission part and the uplink data transmission part included in each time slot in Figure 7 can be different from each other. This design is more suitable for the service to be slotted. Changing scenes. For example, after the downlink network device sends the downlink data, it hopes to receive the feedback information sent by the terminal device as soon as possible. In this case, a self-contained slot structure can be used (such as the third in FIG. 7). The slot structure of the slot).
  • a time slot having a self-contained slot structure means that the time slot includes orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols for downlink data transmission and is used for uplink. OFDM symbol for data transmission.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • the uplink data transmission scheduled by the scheduling information may be in an uplink data transmission part included in the time slot; or, if one If the downlink data transmission part in the slot includes the service data sent to the terminal device, the uplink feedback information of the terminal device for the service data may be in the uplink data transmission part included in the time slot.
  • the uplink feedback information may include a hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK), where the HARQ-ACK may include an acknowledgement (ACK) and a negative acknowledgement (NACK).
  • HARQ-ACK hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement
  • NACK negative acknowledgement
  • the number of time slots for transmitting and/or receiving data determined by the access network device may include the following different types. It is understood that the number of time slots (the number of downlink time slots) used by the access network device to transmit data, and the number of time slots (the number of uplink time slots) used by the access network device to receive data are used by the access network device. The sum of the time slot of the transmitted data and the number of time slots for receiving data, and the number of time slots used by the access network device to transmit and receive data (the time slot here includes the part for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission reception) ). Taking FIG.
  • the number of downlink time slots is one, the number of uplink time slots is five, the time slot for transmitting data, and the number of time slots for receiving data. The sum is six, and the number of time slots for transmitting and receiving data is zero.
  • FIG. 7 in the time range shown, the number of downlink time slots is one, the number of uplink time slots is one, and the number of time slots for transmitting and receiving data is four, and only The sum of the time slot for transmitting data and the number of time slots for receiving data only is two.
  • the data transmission portion included in one slot may include an "unknown" portion in addition to the downlink data transmission portion and the uplink data transmission portion.
  • the duration of a time slot can be unknown, or only part of the time is unknown.
  • the time slot can be regarded as one uplink time slot; if only one unknown part and downlink data are included in one time slot In the transmission part, the time slot can be regarded as a downlink time slot; if a time slot includes both an uplink data transmission part and a downlink data transmission part, and an Unknown part, the time slot can be regarded as one for transmitting data and The time slot in which data is received.
  • Step 403 The access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data.
  • the first indication information used to indicate the number of time units may have the following form:
  • the first indication information may directly indicate the number of slots.
  • the number of time slots indicated by the first indication information includes a transmission structure corresponding to each time slot (for example, for downlink data transmission, for uplink data transmission, or for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission, Still belongs to the unknown state).
  • the transmission structure may be indicated by the first indication information, or may be indicated by other indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates that the number of time slots is 5, and then the access network device may indicate, by using the first indication information or other indication information, a transmission structure corresponding to all time slots or partial time slots of the five time slots.
  • the first indication information indicates a transmission structure corresponding to the time slot.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of time slots corresponding to different transmission structures, that is, the terminal device can determine the number of time slots for the access network device to send and/or receive data. Based on this, it can also be understood that the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data.
  • the first indication information indicates that the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot has the following representation or the content indicated by the first indication information is: [downlink time slot, downlink time slot, uplink time slot, uplink time slot, uplink time slot, uplink time slot, uplink time slot], then the terminal device It can be determined that the number of time slots for transmitting data by the access network device is two, and the number of time slots for receiving data is four.
  • the first indication information indicates a transmission duration of the data transmission by the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may determine the number of time slots for the access network device to send and/or receive data according to the transmission duration and the duration of the time slot corresponding to the system parameter used when the access network device performs data transmission. Based on this, it can also be understood that the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data.
  • the first indication information indicates a system for uplink data transmission (or access network device receiving data) with a transmission duration of 4 milliseconds (millisecond, ms), and uplink data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the first indication information may directly indicate the above content, or may be indirectly indicated.
  • the indirect indication may include the first indication information used to indicate an index information associated with the content of the high layer signaling (eg, RRC signaling) configuration.
  • the first indication information may include two bits, and a total of four different indication contents may be corresponding to each other. The four different indication contents may be configured by using RRC signaling.
  • the first indication information may be public control information and carried in a downlink common control channel.
  • the first indication information may be a slot format indicator (SFI) in the NR system, and is carried in a group common physical downlink control channel (group common PDCCH).
  • SFI may indicate a slot structure or may indicate multiple slot structures. In particular, when the SFI indicates a plurality of slot structures, it can be seen that the SFI indicates the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data.
  • Step 404 The terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the access network device.
  • the labels of the steps 401 and 402 do not limit the sequence, that is, the step 401 may be performed before step 402 or may be performed after step 402. Likewise, step 401 can be performed prior to step 404 or after step 404.
  • Step 405 The terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, the number of the time units.
  • the number of the time units has the following characteristics: when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the number of the time units is An element included in a set; or, when the terminal device determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is in the second set. Elements included.
  • the first set corresponds to the first system parameter
  • the second set corresponds to the second system parameter
  • the first set includes at least one M value, where M is greater than N, and N is a maximum value in the second set, and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  • the time units corresponding to the M and N values herein have the same time unit structure.
  • the M value corresponds to a time unit for uplink data transmission
  • the N value corresponds to a time unit for uplink data transmission
  • the M value corresponds to a time unit for downlink data transmission
  • the N value corresponds to It is also a time unit for downlink data transmission
  • the M value corresponds to the sum of the time unit for downlink data transmission and the number of time units for uplink data transmission
  • N corresponding to the downlink data transmission is also used.
  • the access network device uses the SFI of each time slot to notify the structure of the current time slot, so that the terminal device learns the transmission time of the data transmission with the access network device, it is obvious that the signaling overhead is large, especially When several consecutive time slots have the same structure.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application effectively informs the frame structure on the frequency band when the signaling overhead is ensured, so that the terminal device knows the transmission duration of the data transmission.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of indicating a transmission duration according to an embodiment of the present application, where a time slot of a time unit is transmitted as an example, and a duration of the time slot is measured by using a granularity of 1 ms. Accordingly, the terminal device The transmission time is obtained in units of 1 ms.
  • the first indication information includes L bits for indicating the transmission duration, and L is a positive integer.
  • the information of the L bits may be pre-configured or configured by the access network device using high layer signaling, where the high layer signaling may be high layer broadcast signaling or RRC signaling.
  • the access network device configures control information including L bits, the specific value of L can be configured.
  • the L bits of information may include at least one of the following:
  • L bits control the size of the information (for example, the number of original information bits);
  • the time-frequency resource range may be represented by, for example, a control resource set (CORESET);
  • Radio network tempory indentation used for L bits of control information.
  • the L bits can be represented as 2 L states, and the corresponding values constitute the set ⁇ 1, 2, ..., 2 L ⁇ .
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the access network device, and determines a certain value Y in the set of L bits in the first indication information, and determines the transmission duration. Where Y may be pre-configured by the access network device.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to the formula 1, the transmission duration corresponding to the number of slots in which the access network transmits and/or receives data, that is, the terminal device may use the S in the first indication information, the actually used SCS (first system parameter). And referring to the SCS (second system parameter), determining the transmission duration D corresponding to the number of slots in which the access network transmits and/or receives data:
  • k is the slot duration corresponding to the actually used SCS.
  • the number of time units can be determined by determining the transmission duration.
  • the terminal device may further determine the transmission duration according to Equation 2, that is, the terminal device may determine the access according to Y in the first indication information and the corresponding slot duration 1 ms (second system parameter).
  • Y is as described above and is a value in the set ⁇ 1, 2, ..., 2 L ⁇ .
  • the number of time units can be determined by determining the transmission duration.
  • I i can also be understood as the number of first time slots corresponding to the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data when the access network device and the terminal device perform data transmission using the first system parameter, where The first time slot is a time slot corresponding to the first system parameter.
  • the first time slot corresponding to the first system parameter has the following feature: a slot with a slot duration of 0.25 ms can be regarded as the first time slot.
  • the duration set corresponding to the first system parameter herein can be understood as a time unit in which the access network device sends and/or receives data when the access network device and the terminal device perform data transmission using the first system parameter.
  • J j can also be understood as the second time slot corresponding to the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data when the access network device and the terminal device perform data transmission using the second system parameter.
  • the number, wherein the second time slot is a time slot corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the duration set corresponding to the second system parameter herein can be understood as the transmission duration of the data transmitted and/or received by the access network device when the access network device and the terminal device use the second system parameter for data transmission.
  • the duration set corresponding to the first system parameter includes at least one element, and the element is assumed to be represented by I x ⁇ t1, where I x is a value in the first set. Then, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, I x >J max , wherein the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter is greater than the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the transmission duration indication under different numerology is close or identical, based on this, if If the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the system parameter is greater than the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter, the slot duration corresponding to the first system parameter is smaller than the slot duration corresponding to the second system parameter, and the duration set corresponding to the first system parameter includes at least An element, the number of the first time slots corresponding to the element is greater than the number of the second time slots corresponding to the largest element included in the duration set corresponding to the second system parameter, and the first corresponding to the first system parameter The set includes at least one value greater than a maximum value in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the transmission duration that can be indicated may be one of the following:
  • the transmission duration that can be indicated may be one of the following:
  • 1, 2, ..., 1 ⁇ (60 kHz / 15 kHz), 2 ⁇ (60 kHz / 15 kHz), 2 L ⁇ (60 kHz / 15 kHz) may correspond to the aforementioned I i .
  • at least 2 L ⁇ (60 kHz/15 kHz) of the number of time units that can be indicated by the first system parameter (SCS is 60 kHz) for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is greater than the access network device and the terminal.
  • the data transmission between devices uses the maximum value 2 L of the number of time units that can be indicated by the second system parameter (SCS is 15 kHz).
  • I x /J max S* (the SCS corresponding to the first system parameter/the SCS corresponding to the second system parameter), where S Is a positive integer.
  • the control information includes 2 bits for indicating the transmission duration
  • 2 bits can correspond to 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively.
  • the indicated transmission duration is The number of corresponding slots (which can be understood as the value of J j ) is 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively; when the SCS is 60 kHz (assuming the first system parameter), the number of slots corresponding to the indicated transmission duration (may be It is understood that the value of I i is 4, 8, 12, and 16, respectively. Based on this, it can be observed that there is a certain ratio between the I i corresponding to each element included in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter and the J j corresponding to each element included in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter. Relationship (for example, a scale value of 4).
  • the first set may include the same number of elements as the second set, and the first set may use ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w ⁇
  • the second set can be represented by ⁇ b 1 , b 2 ,..., b w ⁇ , in which case The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , and w are positive integers, and i is a natural number greater than 0 and not greater than w.
  • the number of elements included in the first set may be different from the number of elements included in the second set, for example, the number of elements included in the first set is greater than the number of elements included in the second set,
  • the first set can be represented by ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a x ⁇
  • the second set can be represented by ⁇ b 1 , b 2 , . . .
  • b y ⁇ and the elements in the second set can always be in the first Find a set of elements in a set that have a fixed proportional relationship, ie
  • the value is an integer multiple of K, where i is a natural number greater than 0 and not greater than y, x, y is a positive integer, x is greater than y, and the set ⁇ a 1 , a 2 ,..., a y ⁇ is a set ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , ..., a x ⁇ true subset.
  • the number of elements included in the first set may be different from the number of elements included in the second set, for example, the number of elements included in the first set is smaller than the number of elements included in the second set,
  • the first set can be represented by ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a u ⁇
  • the second set can be represented by ⁇ b 1 , b 2 , . . .
  • the value is an integer multiple of K, where i is a natural number greater than 0 and not greater than u, u, v is a positive integer, u is less than v, and the set ⁇ b 1 , b 2 ,..., b u ⁇ is a set ⁇ b 1 , true subset of b 2 , ..., b v ⁇ .
  • the first set includes at least one element, and a ratio between the element and at least one element in the second set is an integer multiple of K, where K is the first system parameter. a ratio between a corresponding subcarrier spacing and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • K is the first system parameter.
  • the first set is represented by ⁇ a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a p ⁇
  • the second set is represented by ⁇ b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b q ⁇ , and at least one element (or numerical value) exists in the first set.
  • the ratio between a i and at least one element (or value) b j in the second set is an integer multiple of K.
  • some of the elements in the first set, rather than all of them, have a fixed proportional relationship with some of the elements in the second set, rather than all of them.
  • the number of slots corresponding to each element included in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter can be found in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter, the number of slots corresponding to the ratio may be found.
  • the transmission time length of the slot determined by the data transmission using the second system parameter is not indicated by the indication information, that is, the circled portion in FIG.
  • the slot format may be used in combination to indicate that the SFI or the terminal device-specific control information indicates a transmission duration portion that the indication information cannot indicate.
  • the terminal device-specific control information includes control information that only a specific terminal device can demodulate, for example, control information that is scrambled using a terminal device-specific RNTI. For example, in conjunction with FIG.
  • the access network device can use the SFI to indicate that there are three uplink slots after 3 ms, wherein the indications of the three uplink slots can be displayed, and the starting positions of the three uplink slots.
  • the indication (eg after 3ms here) can be explicit or implicit.
  • the implicit indication may be an indication of the combined indication information, and the terminal device may default to the SFI (second indication information) indication after the duration indicated by the first indication information. The number of slots.
  • the length of time circled in FIG. 8 can be indicated by terminal device specific control information.
  • the terminal device-specific control information may be sent on the first downlink slot. Due to the implementation manner of FIG. 8, the uplink/downlink control information is located between the time slot and the circled/uplink time slot of the circled portion.
  • the time delay is generally greater than the minimum processing capability, for example, greater than one time slot, so that regardless of the capabilities of the terminal device, the terminal device specific control information can be scheduled on the last several uplink/downlink time slots.
  • FIG. 9 shows another implementation in which the resolution indication information is not indicated, and the above description is equally applicable to FIG. Different from FIG. 8, the duration portion in which the indication information cannot be indicated is located in one or several slots starting after the end of the downlink, that is, the portion circled in FIG. 9 for the SCS of 30 kHz and the SCS of 60 kHz.
  • the circled part may be indicated by the indication information, and the indication information may be carried in the same downlink control channel as the indication information indicating the duration, or may be separately carried; or the implicit indication method may also be used. That is, the terminal device may include an uplink time slot between the default downlink time slot and the duration indicated by the indication information. It should be noted that if the terminal device specific control information is used to notify the part circled in FIG. 9 , the access network device may also acquire the capability of the terminal device first, and then determine that the part circled in FIG. 9 can be scheduled through specific signaling. Which terminal devices are given.
  • the transmission duration in the time slot may not be indicated by the indication information.
  • SFI can also be used to indicate the portion of the transmission duration within the slot. This is valid for both the implementations of Figures 8 and 9. For example, taking SCS 60 kHz as an example, the transmission duration indicated by the blank portion in FIG. 10 can be indicated by SFI, for example, by an unknown state indicated by SFI.
  • the indication information for indicating the transmission duration may also be indicated by using only the SFI.
  • the first indication information indicates a transmission structure corresponding to the time slot as an example for description. It can be understood that when the first indication information indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the at least one time slot, the terminal device may determine, according to the first indication information, the number of time slots corresponding to the specific transmission structure, which is equivalent to determining the access network. The number of time units that the device sends and/or receives data.
  • the number of the first first time slot that the first indication information can indicate is 4, and
  • the content indicated by the first indication information or the content corresponding to the first indication information is
  • the content indicated by the first indication information includes a transmission structure corresponding to each time slot in addition to the number of time slots (including 4 time slots).
  • the transmission structure 1, the transmission structure 2, the transmission structure 3, and the transmission structure 4 are only used to distinguish the transmission structures corresponding to different time slots, that is, the transmission structure 1, the transmission structure 2, the transmission structure 3, and the transmission structure 4 They are the same transmission structure, or different transmission structures, or part of the transmission structure is the same, and some transmission structures are different. More generally, the transmission structure 1, the transmission structure 2, the transmission structure 3, and the transmission structure 4 herein may be any of the transmission formats shown in Table 2 below.
  • a total of 256 different slot formats (Format 0 to Format 255) can be supported.
  • NR only supports 62 slot formats with explicit meanings, and Format 62 to Format 255 are currently reserved.
  • One of the slot formats is represented by a different transmission type corresponding to 14 OFDM symbols included in the slot, where D (downlink) indicates that the OFDM symbol is used for downlink data transmission, and U (uplink) indicates that the OFDM symbol is used for uplink data. Transmission, X (flexible) indicates that the OFDM symbol is in an unknown state.
  • the subcarrier spacing used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is 30 kHz (corresponding to the second system parameter)
  • the content indicated by the first indication information or Said that the content corresponding to the first indication information may be
  • the first time slot with transmission structure 1 has a first time slot of transmission structure 2
  • the first time slot with transmission structure 3 has a first time slot with transmission structure 4
  • the first time slot with transmission structure 5 has transmission structure 6
  • the first time slot has a first time slot of the transmission structure 7 having a first time slot of the transmission structure 8]
  • the transmission structures 1 to 8 herein are only for distinguishing the transmission structures corresponding to different time slots, and may be any one of the time slot formats in Table 2. Based on this example, it can be observed that when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses different system parameters, the number of time units indicated by the first indication information has the following characteristics: the first indication information indicated by the SCS is indicated by The number of the first time slots is greater than the maximum number of second time slots indicated by the first indication information that is smaller than the SCS. The slot duration corresponding to the SCS large system parameter is less than the slot duration corresponding to the system parameter with a small SCS.
  • the first indication information may indicate a comparable or the same transmission duration. This applies in particular to unlicensed band resources, since access network devices are limited in data transmission time for data transmission on unlicensed band resources after competing for unlicensed band resources, such as MCOT, and MCOT
  • the length is generally restricted by the geographical regulations, and is independent of different system parameters. Therefore, the implementation of the present application can simplify the design of the first indication information under different system parameters, and implement an effective data transmission format and/or data transmission corresponding. An indication of the number of time units.
  • the terminal device may periodically detect the first indication information sent by the access network device, and correspondingly, the access network device may periodically send the first indication information. Assuming that the terminal device detects the first indication information every m time slots, in order to ensure that the terminal device can learn the transmission structure corresponding to each time slot, the first indication information may indicate the transmission corresponding to each time slot of the m time slots. structure.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application in particular, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the first system parameter of the SCS, the number of slots indicated by the first indication information may be greater than when the access network is used.
  • the terminal device When the data transmission between the device and the terminal device uses the second system parameter of the SCS, the number of time slots that the first indication information can indicate. Correspondingly, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the first system parameter of the SCS, the period of detecting the first indication information by the terminal device is greater than that of the access network device and When the data transmission between the terminal devices uses the second system parameter of the SCS, the terminal device detects the period of the first indication information.
  • the following is a specific form of the transmission structure indicated by the first indication information when different system parameters are used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • the SCS corresponding to the first system parameter is 60 kHz
  • the SCS corresponding to the second system parameter is 15 kHz.
  • the content indicated by the first indication information for example, SFI
  • SFI the content indicated by the first indication information
  • the number of time slots indicated by the first indication information is four, and the number of time units and the number of time units for transmitting the data by the access network device indicated by the first indication information are different for different formats.
  • the number of time units of data is [4 0], [3 1], [2 2], [1 3], where X in [X Y] represents the number of time units in which the access network device transmits data, Y Indicates the number of time units in which the access network device receives data, and the time slot 1 to time slot 4 can be understood as the first time slot to the fourth time slot indicated by the SFI, that is, the SFI indicates the time from the first to the last. The order corresponds to different time slots.
  • the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information is at least four, or the first indication.
  • the number of uplink time slots indicated by the information is at least greater than three, or the total number of time slots indicated by the first indication information for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission is greater than four.
  • the content indicated by the first indication information such as SFI may be as shown in Table 4.
  • S1 represents time slot 1
  • S2 represents time slot 2
  • S1 to S16 are the first time slot to the 16th time slot indicated by SFI
  • D and U respectively indicate that the time slot is used for Downlink data transmission is also used for uplink data transmission.
  • the first indication information indicates The number of slots in which the access network device transmits data and the number of slots in which data is received are [16 0], [12 4], [8 8], [4 12], respectively.
  • the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be ⁇ 4, 3, 2, 1 ⁇ , and the number of indicated uplink time slots may be ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ , the number of indicated time slots may be 4, and these may correspond to the second set respectively.
  • the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be ⁇ 16, 12, 8, 4 ⁇ , and the number of indicated uplink time slots may be ⁇ 0, 4, 8 , 12 ⁇ , the number of indicated slots is 16, which may correspond to the first set respectively.
  • any one of the elements included in the first set can find an element proportional to it in the second set, and the proportional relationship between the two elements is between the first system parameter and the second system parameter.
  • the proportional relationship is related to the number of uplink time slots indicated by the first indication information.
  • the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information is taken as an example, and similar descriptions are also made.
  • the content indicated by the first indication information for example, SFI, may be as shown in Table 5.
  • the number of time slots indicated by the first indication information may be different.
  • the first indication information indicates the transmission corresponding to the three time slots. Structure; in the fourth format, the first indication information indicates only the transmission structure corresponding to the two time slots.
  • the number of time units for transmitting data and the number of time units for receiving data indicated by the first indication information are [3 1], [2 1], [1 2], [1 1 ], wherein the X and Y expressions in [X Y] have the same meaning as before.
  • the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information is at least four, or the first indication.
  • the number of uplink time slots indicated by the information is at least greater than two, or the total number of time slots indicated by the first indication information for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission is greater than four.
  • the content indicated by the first indication information for example, the SFI, may be as shown in Table 6. The meanings of the symbols in Table 6 are the same as those in Table 4, and are not specifically described herein.
  • the number of time slots in which the access network device indicated by the first indication information transmits data and the received data The number of slots is [12 4], [8 6], [4 8], [4 9], respectively.
  • the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be ⁇ 3, 2, 1 ⁇
  • the number of indicated uplink time slots may be ⁇ 1, 2 ⁇ .
  • the number of indicated time slots may be ⁇ 4, 3, 2 ⁇ , and these may correspond to the second set respectively.
  • the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be ⁇ 12, 8, 4 ⁇ , and the number of indicated uplink time slots may be ⁇ 4, 6, 8, 9 ⁇ , the number of indicated time slots is ⁇ 16, 14, 12, 13 ⁇ , which respectively correspond to the first set.
  • some of the elements included in the first set can find elements proportional to them in the second set, and the proportional relationship between the two elements is proportional to the first system parameter and the second system parameter.
  • the transmission structure corresponding to the first indication information may be configured by the RRC, and then dynamically indicated by the first indication information, and the time unit for the access network device to send data and/or receive data
  • the number of slots for example, the structure types corresponding to slot 1 to slot 4 in Table 3 can be configured through RRC, and then the first indication information uses 2 bits to indicate different transmission structures. For example, when the value of the 2 bit is 00, the terminal device can determine that the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot 1 to the time slot 4 is:
  • the terminal device determines that the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot 1 to the time slot 4 is:
  • the meaning of the indication is that the control information (first indication information) does not indicate the transmission structure of the corresponding time slot.
  • the first indication information indicates only the transmission structure of S1-S14, and the transmission structure indicating S15 and S16 is not indicated.
  • the transmission structure corresponding to a set of system parameters may be pre-configured by the standard pre-defined or the access network device.
  • the first indication information sent by the access network device directly indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the set of system parameters.
  • the first indication information includes at least 2 bits, which may be included in the indication table 3.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, that the indicated transmission structure corresponds to the third type corresponding to 15 kHz.
  • the format, and then according to the first system parameter and the second system parameter, the transmission format corresponding to 60 kHz can be determined proportionally, that is, the transmission structure corresponding to the eight downlink time slots and the eight uplink time slots in Table 4.
  • the transmission structure corresponding to a set of system parameters may be pre-defined by the standard pre-defined or the access network device. Then, the first indication information sent by the access network device directly indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the set of system parameters. The terminal device may determine, according to the first indication information and the transmission structure corresponding to the set of parameters, that the access network device sends and/or receives data when other system parameters are used when data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is used. The transmission time corresponding to the time unit.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units for the access network device to send and/or receive data within a preset time range, where the access is for the unlicensed band resource, as described above.
  • the time required to re-determine the license-free band availability through the LBT is limited, for example, subject to MCOT restrictions. Therefore, on the unlicensed band resource, in order to ensure the validity of the indication indicated by the first indication information, the first indication information may indicate a transmission structure corresponding to a time slot included in an MCOT, or may indicate an access included in an MCOT. The number of time units in which the network device sends data and/or receives data.
  • the length of time indicated by the first indication information may also be greater than one MCOT.
  • the access network device may pre-determine a downlink time unit pre-configured by the access network device after a competition for resources (except for one MCOT). Time unit for downlink data transmission) and/or uplink time unit (time unit for uplink data transmission).
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data in a preset time range, which may be understood as the first indication information indication.
  • the transmission time length corresponding to the number of time units is within the transmission duration corresponding to the preset time range, or the time units indicated by the first indication information are within a preset time range.
  • the starting position of the preset time range can be indeterminate. For example, in the unlicensed band resource, taking the access network device as an example, the access network device needs to determine the starting position of the MCOT or a transmission opportunity (TxOP, which may also be referred to as a transmission opportunity) according to the result of the CCA.
  • TxOP transmission opportunity
  • the transmission duration corresponding to MCOT or TxOP is related to regulatory constraints and can be considered as pre-set. Therefore, when the first indication information indicates the number of time units for the access network device to send and/or receive data within a preset time range, it can be understood that the indicated time units are within a preset time range. Or the transmission duration corresponding to the indicated time unit is within the corresponding transmission duration within a preset time range.
  • the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units; or the terminal device receives the second indication information sent by the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number of time units.
  • the starting position Regardless of the SCS included in the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the indication information uses 1 ms as the granularity unit to indicate the transmission duration, and the start position of the time unit can pass the system parameters currently used. The corresponding time slot length is notified in units.
  • the following uses the first indication information as an example to illustrate several implementation manners when the first indication information indicates the starting position of the number of time units. It should be noted that the following description also applies to the second indication information.
  • the time units corresponding to the indicated number of time units may be consecutive in time. And a plurality of time units for transmitting data or for receiving data.
  • the starting position of the number of time units can be understood as the time unit from which the access network device transmits data is measured.
  • the starting position of the number of time units may be associated with the first time offset.
  • the starting position of the number of time units may be a time after the time unit is shifted backward by the first time offset.
  • the first time offset may be indicated by the first indication information.
  • the first time offset may include the following implementation manners:
  • the starting position of the number of time units may be the starting position of the corresponding time unit after the time unit in which the first indication information is located is shifted backward by the first time offset. That is, the first time offset is a time offset between a time unit in which the first indication information is located and a first time unit corresponding to the number of time units indicated by the first indication information.
  • FIG. 12a and FIG. 12b illustrate the number of time units for receiving data by the access network device indicated by the first indication information.
  • the specific value corresponding to the first time offset is 1 (representing 1 time unit or 1 time slot)
  • the specific value corresponding to the first time offset is 2 (representing 2 time units) Or 2 time slots).
  • the first time offset is a time offset between a specific time unit and a first time unit corresponding to the number of time units indicated by the first indication information.
  • the specific time unit here may have a certain preset relationship with the time unit in which the first indication information is located, for example, the next time unit of the time unit in which the first indication information is located, for example, as shown in FIG. 13 , still in FIG. 13
  • the number of time units for receiving data by the access network device indicated by the first indication information is taken as an example.
  • the starting position of the number of time units may be based on the ending position of the downlink time unit for sending data of the access network device.
  • the specific value corresponding to the first time offset is 1 (representing 1 time unit or 1 time slot).
  • the terminal device determines the starting position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information according to the control information sent by the access network device (referred to as control information A for convenience of description).
  • control information A for convenience of description
  • the start position #1 the relationship between the time unit in which the control information is located (for the convenience of description, the start position of the time unit is referred to as the start position #2) may have the following relationship Representation.
  • the starting position herein may be represented by the starting boundary of the first time unit in the number of time units indicated by the first indication information, and may also have other representations, which are not specifically limited;
  • the control information may be the first indication information, or may be other indication information different from the first indication information, for example, the second indication information, and may also have other representations, which are not specifically limited.
  • the indication information indicating the start position of the number of time units is different from the first indication information (for example, the second indication information)
  • the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried on the same downlink control channel, and may also be carried in Different downlink control channels. The following is a detailed description of the possible relationship between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2.
  • the starting position #1 and the starting position #2 are the same starting position.
  • the starting position of the number of time units may be the same as the starting position of the time unit including the control information A.
  • the starting position of the number of time units may be the same as the starting position of the time unit including the control information A.
  • time offset There is a certain time offset between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2, and after the starting position #1 is after the starting position #2, the time offset can be expressed by the number of time units. .
  • the starting position #1 starts from This relationship can be satisfied between the starting position #2. As shown in Figure 16.
  • time offset there is a certain time offset between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2, and the starting position #1 is before the starting position #2, and the time offset can also be determined by the number of time units. Said.
  • the terminal device detects the control information A (for example, the first indication information or the second indication information), then The starting position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information may be determined, that is, the starting boundary of the time unit including the control information A may be understood as the starting position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information; There is a certain time offset between the start position #1 and the start position #2, and the control information A may include related information of the time offset.
  • the control information A for example, the first indication information or the second indication information
  • control information A may indicate the time offset, based on which the terminal device once When the control information A (for example, the first indication information or the second indication information) is detected, the time unit position of the control information A and the time offset indicated by the control information A may be included, and the time unit indicated by the first indication information is determined. The starting position of the number.
  • the starting position This relationship can be satisfied between #1 and the starting position #2. As shown in Figure 17.
  • the time offset may be represented by the number of time units, or may also be through the time unit.
  • the transmission duration corresponding to the number is expressed, or other forms are used, and no specific limitation is imposed.
  • the terminal device receives the first When an indication information is used, in addition to determining the sum of the number of time units for transmitting data and receiving data by the access network device, the number of time units for transmitting data by the access network device may be determined according to the first indication information, or An indication information determines the number of time units in which the access network device receives data. For example, as described above, when the first indication information indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot, the terminal device may determine the content according to the first indication information. In particular, the terminal device may determine the starting position of the number of uplink time units according to the number of downlink time units indicated by the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine the starting position by:
  • the terminal device may determine the starting position according to the control information A and the first system parameter.
  • the terminal device may determine the starting position according to the control information A and the second system parameter.
  • the terminal device may be based on the control information A and the reference system parameter (for example, the second system parameter in the embodiment of the present application) , determine the starting position.
  • the reference system parameter for example, the second system parameter in the embodiment of the present application
  • the offset in FIG. 8 can be understood as the content indicated by the control information A.
  • the number of slots corresponding to the offset indicated by the control information A in this example, the first indication information
  • the corresponding transmission duration is 1 ms
  • the uplink indicated by the first indication information is If the number of slots is 3, the terminal device may determine, after 1 slot (or 1 ms) after the detected first indication information, a starting position of the number of uplink slots indicated by the first indication information;
  • the terminal device can determine the first detected
  • the start position after the one time slot (or 1 ms) following the indication information is the start position of the number of uplink time slots indicated by the first indication information.
  • the terminal device can identify the starting position of the more flexible time unit.
  • the transmission duration corresponding to the indication information (for example, offset) associated with the start position in the control information A is 1 ms.
  • the advantage of this is that when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses a larger subcarrier spacing, the indication information associated with the starting location is corresponding to the smaller subcarrier spacing.
  • the time slot transmission time length is understood. Therefore, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses a larger subcarrier spacing, the time offset that can be indicated is greater under the same control information A bit overhead. .
  • the time offset here refers to the time offset between the start position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information and the start position of the control information A.
  • the terminal device may determine, according to the first indication information, a data transmission duration of the data received by the access network device and a start position of the data transmission duration.
  • the terminal device can determine the starting position of the data transmission duration according to the corresponding time slot transmission duration under the specific system parameter.
  • the corresponding time slot transmission duration is 1 ms
  • the specific representation of the control information A associated with the start position of the data transmission duration is assumed to be U, and the terminal device can always be based on U*1 ms. Determine the starting position of the data transmission duration.
  • the time offset associated with the start position of the number of time units may be controlled.
  • the information (the first indication information or the second indication information) is displayed as an indication, and may be implicitly indicated, and is not specifically limited herein.
  • the manner of displaying the indication it means that the bit included in the control information (the first indication information or the second indication information) indicates the offset; when the implicit indication mode is adopted, in one mode, when the first
  • the indication information (or control information) indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot, for example, the content indicated by the first indication information is:
  • the terminal device may determine that if the first downlink time slot indicated by the first indication information is used as a reference point, the start position of the number of uplink time slots used by the access network device to receive data and the reference point may be determined.
  • the offset is 2 slots.
  • the implicit indication may also have other indication forms, and is not specifically limited.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
  • the first indication information used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send data and/or receive data may be physical layer common control information, and is carried in the downlink common control channel.
  • the cell common RNTI scrambling is implemented. Because the physical layer common control information is valid for multiple terminal devices, the first indication information is implemented by using common control information, which can save control signaling overhead.
  • system parameters used for data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device may be different due to different data transmission types.
  • the system parameters corresponding to the control data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device are different from the system parameters corresponding to the service data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device.
  • the first system parameter corresponding to the first set and the second system parameter corresponding to the second set are preferably the same between the terminal device and the access network device. The corresponding system parameter when the data transfer type.
  • the first system parameter and the second system parameter are system parameters corresponding to the service data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device; or the first system parameter and the second system parameter are terminal devices and accesses.
  • the network device performs the corresponding system parameters when controlling data transmission.
  • other representations may be used for the first system parameter and the second system parameter, and are not specifically limited.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a data transmission format transmission method, as shown in FIG. 11 .
  • the transmission method can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1
  • the access network device in the method can be applied to 2 is a schematic structural diagram of the terminal device, which can be applied to the structure diagram of FIG. 3.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is exemplified by the data transmission of the licensed band.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the unlicensed band, and the method includes the following steps:
  • Step 1101 is the same as step 401, and details are not described herein again.
  • Step 1102 The access network device determines a starting position of the number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data.
  • Step 1103 The access network device sends, to the terminal device, first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units for sending and/or receiving data by the access network device.
  • Step 1104 The terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the access network device.
  • the labels of the steps 1101 and 1102 do not limit the sequence, that is, the step 1101 may be performed before the step 1102 or may be performed after the step 1102. Likewise, step 1101 can be performed prior to step 1104 or after step 1104.
  • Step 1105 The terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, a starting position of the number of the time units.
  • the method of determining the starting position of the number of time units is the same as the method of the foregoing embodiment, and will not be described again.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the second indication information and the first system parameter, The start position of the time unit; or, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the second system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device is according to the second The indication information and the second system parameter determine a starting position of the time unit.
  • the first indication information is further used to indicate the number of time units for the access network device to send and/or receive data, and may be carried in the downlink common control channel.
  • the time unit is used.
  • the number is an element included in the first set; or, when the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is included in the second set element.
  • the first set corresponds to the first system parameter
  • the second set corresponds to the second system parameter
  • the first set includes at least one M value
  • the M is greater than N
  • the N is a maximum value in the second set
  • the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  • the access network device can use the first indication information to indicate the sending. And / or the number of time units receiving data, which simplifies the indication of data transmission formats (such as SFI).
  • the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter
  • the number of time units included in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter is corresponding to the second system parameter.
  • the value of the number of time units included in the two sets satisfies the following relationship: the first set includes at least one M value, the M is greater than N, and N is the maximum value in the second set.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is such that the data transmission duration corresponding to the multiple time units indicated by the first indication information is different in different systems regardless of the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device. Similar results can be achieved in the case of parameters, which is especially applicable to data transmission format indications on unlicensed band resources. For example, when it is determined that the first system parameter SCS used by the terminal device and the access network device for data transmission is 60 kHz, then the maximum length that the first indication information can indicate is 2 L ⁇ 0.25 ms (continuing the meaning of the parameters in the previous example) ).
  • the maximum indication duration that the first indication information can indicate is 2 L ⁇ 1 ms, and the transmission duration is greater than the maximum value 2 L ⁇ 0.25 ms in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter. Because on the unlicensed band resources, the access network equipment, once bound to the unlicensed band resources, is subject to geographical regulations, and transmits and/or receives data without reassessing the availability of the unlicensed band resources. The transmission duration is limited. The transmission duration is independent of which system parameter the data transmission uses.
  • the transmission duration may be represented by MCOT, that is, the first indication information indicates the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data in the MCOT, where The MCOT is no larger than the single data transmission duration that is subject to regulatory restrictions on the unlicensed band resources.
  • the limited transmission duration is represented by MCOT, but it should be noted that the limited transmission duration may have other representations. Therefore, with the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the indication of the data transmission format can also realize that regardless of which system parameter is adopted, the data transmission duration corresponding to the indicated time unit is comparable, thereby simplifying data transmission on the unlicensed band resource.
  • the format indicates the design of the method.
  • the transmission duration corresponding to multiple time units that are comparable or identical may be used to implement an effective data transmission format. Indicates and simplifies the design of the data transfer format indication.
  • using the embodiment to indicate the data transmission structure on the unlicensed band can also achieve the following effects:
  • the terminal device may not perform downlink detection during the uplink data transmission period that is not scheduled, thereby achieving the power saving effect.
  • the terminal device can average channel state information (CSI) based on the downlink reference signal measurement.
  • CSI channel state information
  • LBT listen before talk
  • the terminal device can adopt a one shot listening mechanism, that is, if the access network device competes for the use right of the unlicensed band through the LBT, then the terminal device in the MCOT after the access network device competes for the resource
  • the one shot listening mechanism can be used to determine whether the unlicensed band resources that the access network device competes for can continue to be used.
  • the terminal device After the access network device competes to the unlicensed band resource, the terminal device is notified of the frame structure by using the indication information, and only the frame structure included in the MCOT may be notified. If the terminal device is scheduled to be within the uplink data transmission time range indicated by the indication information, Then the terminal device can determine to adopt a one shot listening mechanism before transmitting the data.
  • the present application examples also provide a device (eg, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, etc.) for implementing the above method.
  • a device eg, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, etc.
  • the means for implementing the power tracker and/or power generator described herein may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device.
  • the device may be (i) a self-contained IC; (ii) a set having one or more 1Cs, which may include a memory IC for storing data and/or instructions; (iii) an RFIC, such as an RF receiver or RF transmitter (iv) an ASIC, such as a mobile station modem; (v) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (vi) a receiver, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handset, or a mobile unit; (vii) other, etc. Wait.
  • a self-contained IC may include a memory IC for storing data and/or instructions; (iii) an RFIC, such as an RF receiver or RF transmitter (iv) an ASIC, such as a mobile station modem; (v) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (vi) a receiver, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handset, or a mobile unit; (vii) other, etc. Wait.
  • the method and apparatus provided by the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a terminal device or an access network device (which may be collectively referred to as a wireless device).
  • the terminal device or access network device or wireless device may include a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, contacts, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method, as long as the transmission signal according to the embodiment of the present application can be executed by running a program that records the code of the method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be communicated.
  • the execution body of the method for wireless communication in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or an access network device, or a function capable of calling a program and executing a program in the terminal device or the access network device. Module.
  • a computer readable medium may include, but is not limited to, a magnetic storage device (eg, a hard disk, a floppy disk, or a magnetic tape, etc.), such as a compact disc (CD), a digital versatile disc (DVD). Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drivers, etc.).
  • a magnetic storage device eg, a hard disk, a floppy disk, or a magnetic tape, etc.
  • CD compact disc
  • DVD digital versatile disc
  • Etc. smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drivers, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, without limitation, a wireless channel and various other mediums capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to this application.
  • the implementation of the embodiments constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • the functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present application, or the part contributing to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium.
  • the instructions include a plurality of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or an access network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .

Abstract

Embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for transmitting a data transmission format, relating to the field of communications. The method comprises: a terminal device determining a first system parameter or a second system parameter used by the terminal device and an access network device for data transmission; the terminal device receiving first indication information sent by the access network device, the first indication information being used to indicate a number of time units for sending and/or receiving data by the access network device; and the terminal device determining the number of time units according to the first indication information. The method provided by the embodiments of the present application can provide an effective data transmission format indication method for data transmission with respect to different system parameters.

Description

一种数据传输格式的传输方法和装置Method and device for transmitting data transmission format
本申请要求于2017年12月29日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201711483895.9、申请名称为“一种数据传输格式的传输方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese Patent Application filed on Dec. 29, 2017, the Chinese National Intellectual Property Office, the application number is 201711483895.9, and the application name is "a transmission method and device for a data transmission format", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference. Combined in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种数据传输格式的传输方法和装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and apparatus for transmitting a data transmission format.
背景技术Background technique
在无线通信网络中,各个设备需要利用频率资源进行信息传输,频率资源也被称为频谱或频段。频段可以分为授权频段和免授权频段,免授权频段也叫免许可频段。授权频段是一些运营商专属的频率资源。免许可频段是无线通信网络中公用的频率资源,可以免费使用,不同设备可以在免许可频段上共享使用频率资源。随着通信技术的发展,无线通信网络中传输的信息量日益增加,利用免许可频段传输信息,可以提高无线通信网络中的数据吞吐量,更好地满足用户的需求。In a wireless communication network, each device needs to use frequency resources for information transmission, and the frequency resources are also referred to as spectrum or frequency bands. The frequency band can be divided into a licensed frequency band and an unlicensed frequency band, and the unlicensed frequency band is also called an unlicensed frequency band. The licensed band is a frequency resource exclusive to some operators. The unlicensed band is a common frequency resource in a wireless communication network and can be used free of charge. Different devices can share frequency resources on the unlicensed band. With the development of communication technology, the amount of information transmitted in the wireless communication network is increasing, and the use of the unlicensed band to transmit information can improve the data throughput in the wireless communication network and better meet the needs of users.
但是,当设备抢占免许可频段进行信息传输时,因为在免许可频段上的信息传输是机会性的,所以需要动态确定数据传输格式。另一方面,在免许可频段上的信息传输可以采用多种不同的系统参数,来适配不同的业务类型。因此如何针对不同的系统参数,设计有效的数据传输格式指示方法,是本申请要解决的问题。However, when the device preempts the unlicensed band for information transmission, since the information transmission on the unlicensed band is opportunistic, it is necessary to dynamically determine the data transmission format. On the other hand, information transmission over the unlicensed band can be adapted to different service types using a variety of different system parameters. Therefore, how to design an effective data transmission format indication method for different system parameters is a problem to be solved by the present application.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种数据传输格式的传输方法和装置。The embodiment of the present application provides a method and an apparatus for transmitting a data transmission format.
第一方面,本申请的实施例一种数据传输格式的传输方法,包括:终端设备确定所述终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的第一系统参数或第二系统参数;所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息,确定所述时间单元个数;其中,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应;所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。通 过本申请实施例提供的方法,无论接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用什么样的系统参数,接入网设备都可以使用第一指示信息,来指示发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,这就简化了数据传输格式(如SFI)的指示方法。In a first aspect, a method for transmitting a data transmission format includes: determining, by a terminal device, a first system parameter or a second system parameter used by the terminal device and the access network device for data transmission; Receiving, by the terminal device, the first indication information that is sent by the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a number of time units for sending and/or receiving data by the access network device; Determining, by the first indication information, the number of the time units; wherein, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the time unit The number is an element included in the first set; or, when the terminal device determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is An element included in the two sets; wherein the first set corresponds to the first system parameter, and the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; At least one M value is included in a set, the M is greater than N, the N is a maximum value in the second set, and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than a corresponding one of the first system parameters. Subcarrier spacing. With the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the access network device can use the first indication information to indicate the sending and/or receiving data, regardless of the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device. The number of time units, which simplifies the indication of data transmission formats (such as SFI).
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000001
的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比值为K的整数倍;其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。通过本申请实施例提供的方法,无论接入网设备和终端设备之间数据传输采用使用什么样的系统参数,第一指示信息所指示的多个时间单元对应的数据传输时长在不同的系统参数情况下都能达到相接近的结果,这尤其适用于免许可频段资源上的数据传输格式指示。
In a possible implementation manner, the first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000001
The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set The ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter. With the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, no matter what system parameter is used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the data transmission duration corresponding to the multiple time units indicated by the first indication information is in different system parameters. In the case of similar results, this is especially true for data transmission format indications on unlicensed band resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息、所述第一系统参数以及所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数;或者,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数对应的传输时长。In a possible implementation, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device is configured according to the first indication information. Determining, by the first system parameter and the second system parameter, the number of time units; or determining, by the terminal device, the number of the time units according to the first indication information and the second system parameter The length of the transmission.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置;当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述第一系统参数,或者,根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置。In a possible implementation, the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units; when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission When the first system parameter is used, the terminal device determines the time according to the first indication information and the first system parameter, or according to the first indication information and the second system parameter. a starting position of the number of units; or, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the second system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device according to the first indication The information and the second system parameter determine a starting position of the number of time units.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置;当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息和所述第一系统参数,确定所述时间单元的起始位置;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元的起始位置。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device receives second indication information that is sent by the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units; When the terminal device determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the terminal device determines the time according to the second indication information and the first system parameter. The start position of the unit; or, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the second system parameter for data transmission, the terminal device according to the second indication information and The second system parameter determines a starting position of the time unit.
可选的,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息承载在相同的下行控制信道中。Optionally, the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
可选的,所述第一指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。Optionally, the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间。In a possible implementation manner, the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration; and the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,包括:所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。因此,终端设备在没有被调度的上行数据传输时间段内,可以不执行下行检测,从而达到了节电(power  saving)的功效。In a possible implementation, the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data, and the first indication information is used to indicate the The number of time units in which the network access device transmits and/or receives data within a preset time range, wherein the duration of the preset time range is not greater than the duration of the single data transmission limited by the regulatory band on the unlicensed band resource. . Therefore, the terminal device may not perform downlink detection during the uplink data transmission period that is not scheduled, thereby achieving the power saving effect.
第二方面,本申请的实施例提供一种数据传输格式的传输方法,包括:接入网设备确定发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;所述接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;其中,当所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应;所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。采用本申请实施例提供的方法,数据传输格式的指示也可以实现无论采用哪种系统参数,指示的时间单元对应的数据传输时长具有可比性,从而简化了免许可频段资源上的数据传输格式指示方法的设计。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method, including: determining, by an access network device, a number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data; and the access network device sending the first to a terminal device Instructing information, the first indication information is used to indicate a number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data; wherein, when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, When the first system parameter is the first system parameter, the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or, when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, when the second system parameter is used, The number of time units is an element included in the second set; wherein the first set corresponds to the first system parameter, and the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; the first The set includes at least one M value, the M is greater than N, the N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the sub corresponding to the first system parameter. Wave interval. With the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the indication of the data transmission format can also achieve that the data transmission duration corresponding to the indicated time unit is comparable regardless of which system parameter is adopted, thereby simplifying the data transmission format indication on the unlicensed band resource. Method design.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000002
的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比值为K的整数倍;其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。
In a possible implementation manner, the first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000002
The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set The ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
可选的,所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置。Optionally, the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置。In a possible implementation manner, the access network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
可选的,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息承载在相同的下行控制信道中。Optionally, the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间。In a possible implementation manner, the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration; and the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,包括:所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。In a possible implementation, the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data, and the first indication information is used to indicate the The number of time units in which the network access device transmits and/or receives data within a preset time range, wherein the duration of the preset time range is not greater than the duration of the single data transmission limited by the regulatory band on the unlicensed band resource. .
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端设备,用于执行第一方面的方法。具体地,所述终端设备包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任意一种实现方式中的方法的单元。In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device for performing the method of the first aspect. In particular, the terminal device comprises means for performing the method of the first aspect or any one of the implementations of the first aspect.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种接入网设备,用于执行第二方面的方法。具体地,所述接入网设备包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任意一种实现方式中的方法的单元。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an access network device, where the method of the second aspect is performed. Specifically, the access network device includes means for performing the method in any one of the second aspect or the second aspect.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种数据传输格式的传输方法,包括:终端设备确定所述终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的第一系统参数或第二系统参数;所述终端设备接收接入网设备发送的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的起始位置;所述终端设备根据所述指示信息, 确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置;其中,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述指示信息和所述第一系统参数,或根据所述指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置。In a fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method, including: determining, by a terminal device, a first system parameter or a second system parameter used by the terminal device and an access network device to perform data transmission; The terminal device receives the indication information sent by the access network device, where the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data; the terminal device according to the indication Determining a starting position of the number of time units; wherein, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device Determining a starting position of the number of time units according to the indication information and the first system parameter, or according to the indication information and the second system parameter; or when the terminal device determines the terminal When the device and the access network device use the second system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device according to the indication information and the second system Parameters determining the starting position of the number of time units.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应,所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。In a possible implementation, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the number of the time units is in the first set. The included element; or, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the second system parameter for data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the second set Wherein the first set corresponds to the first system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter, the first set includes at least one M value, and the M is greater than N The N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000003
的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比值为K的整数倍;其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。
In a possible implementation manner, the first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000003
The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set The ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
可选的,所述第一指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。Optionally, the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时隙持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时隙持续时间。In a possible implementation manner, the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration; and the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的起始位置,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。In a possible implementation, the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data within a preset time range, where the preset time is The duration of the range corresponds to no more than a single data transmission duration subject to regulatory restrictions on the unlicensed band resources.
可选的,所述指示信息还用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。Optionally, the indication information is further used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种数据传输格式的传输方法,包括:接入网设备确定发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的起始位置;所述接入网设备向终端设备发送指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的起始位置。In a sixth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method, including: determining, by an access network device, a starting position of a number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data; and the access network device to the terminal device Sending indication information, the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应,所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。In a possible implementation manner, when the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or When the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the second set; wherein the first set and the first Corresponding to a system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter, the first set includes at least one M value, the M is greater than N, and the N is in the second set The maximum value, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000004
的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比值为K的整数倍;其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。
In a possible implementation manner, the first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000004
The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , w are positive integers, i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w; or at least one value in the first set is related to the second set The ratio between the at least one of the values is an integer multiple of K; wherein K is a ratio between a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
可选的,所述指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。Optionally, the indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时隙持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时隙持续时间。In a possible implementation manner, the first system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration; and the second system parameter includes a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a slot duration.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的起始位置,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。In a possible implementation, the indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data within a preset time range, where the preset time is The duration of the range corresponds to no more than a single data transmission duration subject to regulatory restrictions on the unlicensed band resources.
可选的,所述指示信息还用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。Optionally, the indication information is further used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种终端设备,用于执行第五方面的方法。具体地,所述终端设备包括用于执行第五方面或第五方面的任意一种实现方式中的方法的单元。In a seventh aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a terminal device for performing the method of the fifth aspect. Specifically, the terminal device includes means for performing the method in any one of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种接入网设备,用于执行第六方面的方法。具体地,所述接入网设备包括用于执行第六方面或第六方面的任意一种实现方式中的方法的单元。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an access network device, where the method of the sixth aspect is performed. Specifically, the access network device includes means for performing the method in any one of the sixth aspect or the sixth aspect.
第九方面,本申请提供了一种计算机存储介质,其上储存计算机程序(指令),当该程序(指令)在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行第一方面、第二方面、第五方面、或第六方面所述的方法。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer storage medium on which a computer program (instruction) is stored, and when the program (instruction) is run on a computer, the computer is caused to perform the first aspect, the second aspect, and the fifth aspect. Or the method described in the sixth aspect.
第十方面,本申请提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持接入网设备以及终端设备实现上述方面中所涉及的功能,例如,例如生成或处理上述方法中所涉及的数据和/或信息。在一种可能的设计中,所述芯片系统还包括存储器,所述存储器,用于保存接入网设备以及终端设备必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a chip system including a processor for supporting an access network device and a terminal device to implement the functions involved in the foregoing aspects, such as, for example, generating or processing the method involved in the foregoing method. Data and / or information. In a possible design, the chip system further comprises a memory for storing the necessary program instructions and data of the access network device and the terminal device. The chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种通信装置,包括处理器和存储器;所述存储器用于存储计算机执行指令;所述处理器用于执行所述存储器所存储的计算机执行指令,以使所述通信装置执行第一方面、第二方面、第五方面、或第六方面所述的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the application provides a communication device including a processor and a memory; the memory is configured to store a computer execution instruction; the processor is configured to execute a computer execution instruction stored by the memory to enable the communication The apparatus performs the method of the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect, or the sixth aspect.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括上述第三方面所述的终端设备和第四方面的接入网设备。According to a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a communication system, comprising the terminal device according to the above third aspect and the access network device of the fourth aspect.
第十三方面,本申请提供一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括上述第七方面所述的终端设备和第八方面的接入网设备。In a thirteenth aspect, the present application provides a communication system, comprising the terminal device according to the seventh aspect and the access network device of the eighth aspect.
综上,采用本申请实施方式,可以在接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用不同系统参数时,指示可比或者相同的多个时间单元对应的传输时长,从而实现有效的数据传输格式指示,且简化了数据传输格式指示的设计方法。In summary, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses different system parameters, the transmission duration corresponding to multiple time units that are comparable or identical may be used to implement an effective data transmission format. Indicates and simplifies the design of the data transfer format indication.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信系统的架构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种接入网设备的结构示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an access network device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种数据传输方法流程示意图;4 is a schematic flowchart of a data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的不同SCS与对应的时隙时长的示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of different SCSs and corresponding time slot durations according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种帧结构示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种帧结构示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of another frame provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种指示传输时长的示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of indicating a transmission duration according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种指示传输时长的示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another indication transmission duration provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种指示传输时长的示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another indication transmission duration provided by an embodiment of the present application; FIG.
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一种数据传输方法流程示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of another data transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12a、图12b为本申请实施例提供的一种采用第一指示信息指示接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数的示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the number of time units indicating that the access network device receives data by using the first indication information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图13为本申请实施例提供的另一种采用第一指示信息指示接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数的示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another time unit number indicating that an access network device receives data by using the first indication information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14为本申请实施例提供的另一种采用第一指示信息指示接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数的示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another time unit number indicating that an access network device receives data by using the first indication information according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种起始位置#1和起始位置#2不同关系的示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a different relationship between a starting position #1 and a starting position #2 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的另一种起始位置#1和起始位置#2不同关系的示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of another relationship between a starting position #1 and a starting position #2 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的另一种起始位置#1和起始位置#2不同关系的示意图。FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing another relationship between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2 provided by the embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本申请各个实施例中的技术方案或特征可以相互组合。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. It should be noted that, in the case of no conflict, the technical solutions or features in the various embodiments of the present application may be combined with each other.
本申请实施例中的“一个”意味着单个个体,并不代表只能是一个个体,不能应用于其他个体中。例如,本申请实施例中的“一个终端设备”指的是针对某一个终端设备,并不意味着只能应用于一个特定的终端设备。本申请中,术语“系统”可以和“网络”相互替换使用。"One" in the embodiment of the present application means a single individual, and does not mean that it can only be one individual, and cannot be applied to other individuals. For example, "a terminal device" in the embodiment of the present application refers to a certain terminal device, and does not mean that it can be applied to only one specific terminal device. In the present application, the term "system" can be used interchangeably with "network".
本申请中的“一个实施例”(或“一个实现”)或“实施例”(或“实现”)的引用意味着连同实施例描述的特定特征、结构、特点等包括在至少一个实施例中。因此,说明书的各个位置中出现的“在一个实施例中”或“在实施例中”,并不表示都指代相同实施例。References to "one embodiment" (or "an implementation") or "an embodiment" (or "an implementation") in this application are meant to include the particular features, structures, features, etc. described in connection with the embodiments, in at least one embodiment. . Thus, "in one embodiment" or "in an embodiment" or "an"
进一步地,本申请实施例中的“A和/或B”和“A和B中至少一个”的情况下使用术语“和/或”和“至少一个”包括三种方案中的任一种,即,包括A但不包括B的方案、包括B不包括A的方案、以及两个选项A和B都包括的方案。作为另一示例,在“A、B、和/或C”和“A、B、和/或C中至少一个”的情况下,这样的短语包括六种方案中的任一种,即,包括A但不包括B和C的方案、包括B不包括A和C的方案、包括C但不包括A和B的方案,包括A和B但不包括C的方案,包括B和 C但不包括A的方案,包括A和C但不包括B的方案,以及三个选项A、B和C都包括的方案。如本领域和相关领域普通技术人员所容易理解的,对于其他类似的描述,本申请实施例均可以按照上述方式理解。Further, the terms "and/or" and "at least one" in the case of "A and/or B" and "at least one of A and B" in the embodiment of the present application include any one of three schemes, That is, a scheme including A but not including B, a scheme including B not including A, and a scheme including both options A and B. As another example, in the case of "A, B, and/or C" and "at least one of A, B, and/or C", such a phrase includes any of the six schemes, ie, includes A, but does not include the B and C schemes, including B without A and C, including C but not A and B, including A and B but not C, including B and C but not A The scheme includes the schemes of A and C but not B, and the schemes of all three options A, B and C. As will be readily understood by one of ordinary skill in the art and related art, the embodiments of the present application can be understood as described above.
图1示出了无线设备与无线通信系统的通信示意图。所述无线通信系统可以是应用各种无线接入技术(radio access technology,RAT)的系统,例如码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)、时分多址(time division multiple access,TDMA)、频分多址(frequency division multiple access,FDMA)、正交频分多址(orthogonal frequency-division multiple access,OFDMA)、或单载波频分多址(single carrier FDMA,SC-FDMA)和其它系统等。例如无线通信系统可以是长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统,CDMA系统,宽带码分多址(wideband CDMA,WCDMA)系统,全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统,无线局域网(wireless local area network,WLAN)系统,新空口(New Radio,NR)系统,各种演进或者融合的系统,以及面向未来的通信技术的系统。本申请实施例描述的系统架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of communication between a wireless device and a wireless communication system. The wireless communication system may be a system that applies various radio access technologies (RATs), such as code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Frequency division multiple access (FDMA), orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA), or single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) and other systems . For example, the wireless communication system may be a long term evolution (LTE) system, a CDMA system, a wideband code division multiple access (wideband CDMA (WCDMA) system, a global system for mobile communications (GSM) system, a wireless local area network ( Wireless local area network (WLAN) system, New Radio (NR) system, various evolved or fused systems, and systems for future-oriented communication technologies. The system architecture and the service scenario described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of more clearly illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and do not constitute a limitation of the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application. The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are equally applicable to similar technical problems.
为简明起见,图1中示出了一个网络设备102(例如接入网设备),以及两个无线设备104(例如终端设备)的通信。一般而言,无线通信系统可以包括任意数目的网络设备以及终端设备。无线通信系统还可以包括一个或多个核心网设备或用于承载虚拟化网络功能的设备等。所述接入网设备102可以通过一个或者多个载波为无线设备提供服务。本申请中又将接入网设备和终端设备统称为无线装置。For simplicity, one network device 102 (e.g., an access network device) and two wireless devices 104 (e.g., terminal devices) are shown in Figure 1. In general, a wireless communication system can include any number of network devices as well as terminal devices. The wireless communication system may also include one or more core network devices or devices for carrying virtualized network functions, and the like. The access network device 102 can provide services to the wireless device over one or more carriers. In the present application, the access network device and the terminal device are collectively referred to as a wireless device.
本申请中,所述接入网设备102是一种部署在无线接入网中用以为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置。所述接入网设备可以包括各种形式的宏基站(base station,BS),微基站(也称为小站),中继站,或接入点等。在采用不同的无线接入技术的系统中,具备无线接入功能的设备的名称可能会有所不同,例如,在LTE系统中,称为演进的节点B(evolved NodeB,eNB或者eNodeB),在第三代(3rd generation,3G)系统中,称为节点B(Node B)等。为方便描述,为方便描述,本申请中,简称为接入网设备,有时也称为基站。In the present application, the access network device 102 is a device deployed in a wireless access network to provide a wireless communication function for a terminal device. The access network device may include various forms of a macro base station (BS), a micro base station (also referred to as a small station), a relay station, or an access point. In a system using different radio access technologies, the name of a device with radio access capability may be different, for example, in an LTE system, called an evolved Node B (eNB or eNodeB), In the third generation (3rd generation, 3G) system, it is called Node B (Node B). For convenience of description, for convenience of description, in the present application, it is simply referred to as an access network device, sometimes also referred to as a base station.
本申请实施例中所涉及到的无线设备可以包括各种具有无线通信功能的手持设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备。所述无线设备可以称为终端设备,也可以称为移动台(mobile station,简称MS),终端(terminal),用户设备(user equipment,UE)等。所述无线设备可以是包括用户单元(subscriber unit)、蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、智能电话(smart phone)、无线数据卡、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)电脑、平板型电脑、调制解调器(modem)或调制解调器处理器(modem processor)、手持设备(handheld)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、上网本、无绳电话(cordless phone)或者无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)台、蓝牙设备、机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC)终端等。为方便描述,本申请中,简称为终端设备或UE。The wireless devices involved in the embodiments of the present application may include various handheld devices having wireless communication functions, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to the wireless modem. The wireless device may be referred to as a terminal device, and may also be referred to as a mobile station (MS), a terminal, a user equipment (UE), or the like. The wireless device may be a subscriber unit, a cellular phone, a smart phone, a wireless data card, a personal digital assistant (PDA) computer, a tablet computer, a modem ( Modem) or modem processor, handheld, laptop computer, netbook, cordless phone or wireless local loop (WLL) station, Bluetooth device , machine type communication (MTC) terminal, etc. For convenience of description, in the present application, it is simply referred to as a terminal device or a UE.
无线设备可以支持用于无线通信的一种或多种无线技术,例如5G,LTE,WCDMA, CDMA,1X,时分-同步码分多址(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access,TS-SCDMA),GSM,802.11等等。无线设备也可以支持载波聚合技术。The wireless device can support one or more wireless technologies for wireless communication, such as 5G, LTE, WCDMA, CDMA, 1X, Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TS-SCDMA), GSM, 802.11 and more. Wireless devices can also support carrier aggregation techniques.
多个无线设备可以执行相同或者不同的业务。例如,移动宽带业务,增强移动宽带(Enhanced Mobile Broadband,eMBB)业务,终端设极高可靠极低时延通信(Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication,URLLC)业务等等。Multiple wireless devices can perform the same or different services. For example, mobile broadband services, Enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) services, and Ultra-Reliable and Low-Latency Communication (URLLC) services.
进一步地,上述接入网设备102的一种可能的结构示意图可以如图2所示。该接入网设备102能够执行本申请实施例提供的方法。其中,该接入网设备102可以包括:控制器或处理器201(下文以处理器201为例进行说明)以及收发器202。控制器/处理器201有时也称为调制解调器处理器(modem processor)。调制解调器处理器201可包括基带处理器(baseband processor,BBP)(未示出),该基带处理器处理经数字化的收到信号以提取该信号中传达的信息或数据比特。如此,BBP通常按需或按期望实现在调制解调器处理器201内的一个或多个数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)中或实现为分开的集成电路(integrated circuit,IC)。Further, a possible schematic diagram of the foregoing access network device 102 can be as shown in FIG. 2. The access network device 102 is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiments of the present application. The access network device 102 may include a controller or a processor 201 (hereinafter, the processor 201 is taken as an example) and a transceiver 202. Controller/processor 201 is sometimes also referred to as a modem processor. Modem processor 201 can include a baseband processor (BBP) (not shown) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information or data bits conveyed in the signal. As such, the BBP is typically implemented in one or more digital signal processors (DSPs) within the modem processor 201 or as separate integrated circuits (ICs) as needed or desired.
收发器202可以用于支持接入网设备102与终端设备之间收发信息,以及支持终端设备之间进行无线电通信。所述处理器201还可以用于执行各种终端设备与其他网络设备通信的功能。在上行链路,来自终端设备的上行链路信号经由天线接收,由收发器202进行调解,并进一步处理器201进行处理来恢复终端设备所发送的业务数据和/或信令信息。在下行链路上,业务数据和/或信令消息由终端设备进行处理,并由收发器202进行调制来产生下行链路信号,并经由天线发射给UE。所述接入网设备102还可以包括存储器203,可以用于存储该接入网设备102的程序代码和/或数据。收发器202可以包括独立的接收器和发送器电路,也可以是同一个电路实现收发功能。所述接入网设备102还可以包括通信单元204,用于支持所述接入网设备102与其他网络实体进行通信。例如,用于支持所述接入网设备102与核心网的网络设备等进行通信。The transceiver 202 can be used to support the transmission and reception of information between the access network device 102 and the terminal device, and to support radio communication between the terminal devices. The processor 201 can also be used to perform functions of communication between various terminal devices and other network devices. On the uplink, the uplink signal from the terminal device is received via the antenna, coordinated by the transceiver 202, and further processed by the processor 201 to recover the traffic data and/or signaling information transmitted by the terminal device. On the downlink, the traffic data and/or signaling messages are processed by the terminal device and modulated by the transceiver 202 to generate a downlink signal and transmitted to the UE via the antenna. The access network device 102 can also include a memory 203 that can be used to store program code and/or data for the access network device 102. The transceiver 202 can include separate receiver and transmitter circuits, or the same circuit can implement transceiving functions. The access network device 102 can also include a communication unit 204 for supporting the access network device 102 to communicate with other network entities. For example, it is used to support the access network device 102 to communicate with a network device or the like of the core network.
可选的,接入网设备还可以包括总线。其中,收发器202、存储器203以及通信单元204可以通过总线与处理器201连接。例如,总线可以是外设部件互连标准(Peripheral Component Interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(Extended Industry Standard Architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线可以包括地址总线、数据总线、以及控制总线等。Optionally, the access network device may further include a bus. The transceiver 202, the memory 203, and the communication unit 204 can be connected to the processor 201 through a bus. For example, the bus can be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus. The bus may include an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like.
图3为上述无线通信系统中,终端设备的一种可能的结构示意图。该终端设备能够执行本申请实施例提供的方法。该终端设备可以是两个终端设备104中的任一个。所述终端设备包括收发器301,应用处理器(application processor)302,存储器303和调制解调器处理器(modem processor)304。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a possible structure of a terminal device in the above wireless communication system. The terminal device is capable of performing the method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The terminal device can be any of the two terminal devices 104. The terminal device includes a transceiver 301, an application processor 302, a memory 303, and a modem processor 304.
收发器301可以调节(例如,模拟转换、滤波、放大和上变频等)该输出采样并生成上行链路信号,该上行链路信号经由天线发射给上述实施例中所述的基站。在下行链路上,天线接收接入网设备发射的下行链路信号。收发器301可以调节(例如,滤波、放大、下变频以及数字化等)从天线接收的信号并提供输入采样。The transceiver 301 can condition (e.g., analog convert, filter, amplify, upconvert, etc.) the output samples and generate an uplink signal that is transmitted via an antenna to the base station described in the above embodiments. On the downlink, the antenna receives the downlink signal transmitted by the access network device. Transceiver 301 can condition (eg, filter, amplify, downconvert, digitize, etc.) the signals received from the antenna and provide input samples.
调制解调器处理器304有时也称为控制器或处理器,可包括基带处理器(baseband processor,BBP)(未示出),该基带处理器处理经数字化的收到信号以提取该信号中传 达的信息或数据比特。BBP通常按需或按期望实现在调制解调器处理器304内的一个或多个数字中或实现为分开的集成电路(IC)。 Modem processor 304, also sometimes referred to as a controller or processor, may include a baseband processor (BBP) (not shown) that processes the digitized received signal to extract information conveyed in the signal Or data bits. The BBP is typically implemented in one or more numbers within the modem processor 304 or as a separate integrated circuit (IC), as needed or desired.
在一个设计中,调制解调器处理器(modem processor)304可包括编码器3041,调制器3042,解码器3043,解调器3044。编码器3041用于对待发送信号进行编码。例如,编码器3041可用于接收要在上行链路上发送的业务数据和/或信令消息,并对业务数据和信令消息进行处理(例如,格式化、编码、或交织等)。调制器3042用于对编码器3041的输出信号进行调制。例如,调制器可对编码器的输出信号(数据和/或信令)进行符号映射和/或调制等处理,并提供输出采样。解调器3044用于对输入信号进行解调处理。例如,解调器3044处理输入采样并提供符号估计。解码器3043用于对解调后的输入信号进行解码。例如,解码器3043对解调后的输入信号解交织、和/或解码等处理,并输出解码后的信号(数据和/或信令)。编码器3041、调制器3042、解调器3044和解码器3043可以由合成的调制解调处理器304来实现。这些单元根据无线接入网采用的无线接入技术来进行处理。In one design, a modem processor 304 may include an encoder 3041, a modulator 3042, a decoder 3043, and a demodulator 3044. The encoder 3041 is for encoding the signal to be transmitted. For example, encoder 3041 can be used to receive traffic data and/or signaling messages to be transmitted on the uplink and to process (eg, format, encode, or interleave, etc.) the traffic data and signaling messages. Modulator 3042 is used to modulate the output signal of encoder 3041. For example, the modulator can perform symbol mapping and/or modulation processing on the encoder's output signals (data and/or signaling) and provide output samples. A demodulator 3044 is used to demodulate the input signal. For example, demodulator 3044 processes the input samples and provides symbol estimates. The decoder 3043 is configured to decode the demodulated input signal. For example, the decoder 3043 deinterleaves, and/or decodes the demodulated input signal and outputs the decoded signal (data and/or signaling). Encoder 3041, modulator 3042, demodulator 3044, and decoder 3043 may be implemented by a composite modem processor 304. These units are processed according to the radio access technology employed by the radio access network.
调制解调器处理器304从应用处理器302接收可表示语音、数据或控制信息的数字化数据,并对这些数字化数据处理后以供传输。所属调制解调器处理器可以支持多种通信系统的多种无线通信协议中的一种或多种,例如LTE,新空口,通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System,UMTS),高速分组接入(High Speed Packet Access,HSPA)等等。可选的,调制解调器处理器304中也可以包括一个或多个存储器。 Modem processor 304 receives digitized data representative of voice, data or control information from application processor 302 and processes the digitized data for transmission. The associated modem processor can support one or more of a variety of wireless communication protocols of various communication systems, such as LTE, new air interface, Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), high speed packet access (High Speed) Packet Access, HSPA) and more. Optionally, one or more memories may also be included in the modem processor 304.
可选的,该调制解调器处理器304和应用处理器302可以是集成在一个处理器芯片中。Alternatively, the modem processor 304 and the application processor 302 may be integrated in one processor chip.
存储器303用于存储用于支持所述终端设备通信的程序代码(有时也称为程序,指令,软件等)和/或数据。The memory 303 is used to store program code (sometimes referred to as programs, instructions, software, etc.) and/or data for supporting communication of the terminal device.
需要说明的是,该存储器203或存储器303可以包括一个或多个存储单元,例如,可以是用于存储程序代码的处理器201或调制解调器处理器304或应用处理器302内部的存储单元,或者可以是与处理器201或调制解调器处理器304或应用处理器302独立的外部存储单元,或者还可以是包括处理器201或调制解调器处理器304或应用处理器302内部的存储单元以及与处理器201或调制解调器处理器304或应用处理器302独立的外部存储单元的部件。It should be noted that the memory 203 or the memory 303 may include one or more storage units, for example, may be a processor 201 for storing program code or a storage unit inside the modem processor 304 or the application processor 302, or may Is an external storage unit separate from the processor 201 or the modem processor 304 or the application processor 302, or may also be a storage unit including the processor 201 or the modem processor 304 or the application processor 302 and with the processor 201 or modem The processor 304 or the application processor 302 is a separate component of an external storage unit.
处理器201和调制解调器处理器301可以是相同类型的处理器,也可以是不同类型的处理器。例如可以实现在中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP),专用集成电路(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件、其他集成电路、或者其任意组合。处理器201和调制解调器处理器301可以实现或执行结合本申请实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能器件的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合或者片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SOC)等等。The processor 201 and the modem processor 301 may be the same type of processor or different types of processors. For example, it can be implemented in a central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), and a field programmable gate array ( Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, transistor logic device, hardware component, other integrated circuit, or any combination thereof. The processor 201 and the modem processor 301 can implement or perform various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application. The processor may also be a combination of computing function devices, for example, including one or more microprocessor combinations, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, or a system-on-a-chip (SOC) or the like.
本领域技术人员能够理解,结合本申请所公开的诸方面描述的各种解说性逻辑块、 模块、电路和算法可被实现为电子硬件、存储在存储器中或另一计算机可读介质中并由处理器或其它处理设备执行的指令、或这两者的组合。作为示例,本文中描述的设备可用在任何电路、硬件组件、IC、或IC芯片中。本申请所公开的存储器可以是任何类型和大小的存储器,且可被配置成存储所需的任何类型的信息。为清楚地解说这种可互换性,以上已经以其功能性的形式一般地描述了各种解说性组件、框、模块、电路和步骤。此类功能性如何被实现取决于具体应用、设计选择和/或加诸于整体系统上的设计约束。本领域技术人员可针对每种特定应用以不同方式来实现所描述的功能性,但此类实现决策不应被解读为致使脱离本申请的范围。Those skilled in the art can appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, circuits, and algorithms described in connection with the aspects disclosed herein can be implemented as electronic hardware, stored in a memory, or in another computer-readable medium and An instruction executed by a processor or other processing device, or a combination of the two. By way of example, the devices described herein can be used in any circuit, hardware component, IC, or IC chip. The memory disclosed herein can be any type and size of memory and can be configured to store any type of information as desired. To clearly illustrate this interchangeability, various illustrative components, blocks, modules, circuits, and steps have been described. How such functionality is implemented depends on the specific application, design choices, and/or design constraints imposed on the overall system. A person skilled in the art can implement the described functionality in different ways for each particular application, but such implementation decisions should not be interpreted as causing a departure from the scope of the application.
图1所示的无线通信系统架构示意图中,无线接入网设备,例如基站,无线局域网接入点等各种传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP),为终端设备提供许可频段下的接入服务或免许可频段下的接入服务。免许可频段是可以免费使用的频段,不同设备可以在免许可频段上共享使用资源。运营商利用免许可频段资源可以达到网络容量分流的目的,但是需要遵从不同的地域和不同的频谱对免许可频段资源的法规要求。以免许可目标频段是各国政府开放的5GHz的免许可频段为例,其共存规范包括传输功率控制(transmit power control,TPC),动态频率选择(dynamic frequency selection,DFS),信道占用带宽和先听后说(listen before talk,LBT)等等。一般而言,先听后说LBT是系统间的共存策略,无线通信系统在占用免许可频段通信时需使用LBT规则,下面针对LBT规则具体展开说明。In the schematic diagram of the wireless communication system shown in FIG. 1, a radio access network device, such as a base station, a wireless local area network access point, and the like, a transmission reception point (TRP), provides access to a licensed device in a licensed frequency band. Access services under service or unlicensed bands. Unlicensed bands are bands that can be used free of charge, and different devices can share resources on unlicensed bands. Operators can use the unlicensed band resources to achieve the purpose of network capacity offloading, but need to comply with the regulatory requirements of the unlicensed band resources in different geographies and different spectrums. For example, the license target frequency band is a 5 GHz unlicensed frequency band opened by governments. The coexistence specifications include transmission power control (TPC), dynamic frequency selection (DFS), channel occupied bandwidth, and after listening. Said (listen before talk, LBT) and so on. Generally speaking, the LBT is a coexistence strategy between systems. The wireless communication system needs to use the LBT rule when occupying the unlicensed band communication. The following describes the LBT rules.
以目前可以工作在免许可频段的无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)通信系统为例。Wi-Fi通信系统应用的一种竞争资源的方法是LBT规则。LBT规则的基本思想为:每个通信设备在某个信道上发送数据之前,需要先检测当前信道是否空闲,即是否可以检测到附近节点正在占用该信道发送数据,这一检测过程被称为空闲信道评测(clear channel assessment,CCA)。如果该通信设备检测到信道被占用,那么该通信设备当前就无法在该信道上传输数据,反之,如果在一段时间内检测到信道空闲,那么该通信设备就可以发送数据,并且一般而言,为了保持和其他通信设备的友好共存,在该信道上发送数据的时间是有限制的,在此限制的时间范围内,该通信设备不需要对该信道进行空闲评测;或者,在此限制的时间范围内,该通信设备还可以将竞争到的免许可频段资源和其他通信设备进行共享。具体的,和该通信设备具有某种关系的其他通信设备,可以高优先级地使用该免许可频段资源。这里,与该通信设备具有某种关系的其他通信设备,可以理解为该通信设备服务的其他通信设备,例如假设该通信设备为基站,则与该通信设备服务的其他通信设备可以理解为该基站服务的终端设备,又或者,如果该通信设备为终端设备,那么与该通信设备具有某种关系的其他通信设备可以理解为该终端设备的服务基站,或者是该终端设备的服务基站服务的其他用户设备。其次,这里,高优先级使用该免许可频段资源,可以包括其他通信设备可以在上述限制的时间范围内,使用免许可频段资源时不需要对信道进行空闲评测,或者如果需要空闲评测,也可以采用高优先级的CCA方式进行侦听。Take, for example, a wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) communication system that can currently operate in an unlicensed band. One method of competing resources for Wi-Fi communication system applications is the LBT rule. The basic idea of the LBT rule is: Before each communication device sends data on a certain channel, it needs to detect whether the current channel is idle, that is, whether it can detect that the nearby node is occupying the channel to transmit data. This detection process is called idle. Clear channel assessment (CCA). If the communication device detects that the channel is occupied, then the communication device is currently unable to transmit data on the channel. Conversely, if the channel is detected to be idle for a period of time, the communication device can transmit data, and in general, In order to maintain friendly coexistence with other communication devices, the time for transmitting data on the channel is limited, and within this limited time range, the communication device does not need to perform idle evaluation on the channel; or, at this limited time Within the scope, the communication device can also share the unlicensed band resources that are competing with other communication devices. Specifically, the other communication device having a certain relationship with the communication device can use the unlicensed band resource with high priority. Here, other communication devices having a certain relationship with the communication device can be understood as other communication devices served by the communication device. For example, if the communication device is a base station, other communication devices serving with the communication device can be understood as the base station. The terminal device of the service, or if the communication device is a terminal device, the other communication device having a certain relationship with the communication device can be understood as the serving base station of the terminal device or other service of the serving base station of the terminal device. User equipment. Secondly, here, the high priority uses the unlicensed band resource, which may include other communication devices that can use the unlicensed band resource when the unlicensed band resource is used, and does not need to idle evaluation of the channel, or if idle evaluation is needed, Listening is performed using a high-priority CCA method.
为了便于描述,在本申请中,上述限制的时间范围,称为一个最大信道占用时间(maximum channel occupancy time,MCOT)。该MCOT的具体数值与各地法规有关,亦或者,与标准定义有关。例如,在5GHz频段,根据日本法规,MCOT可以为4ms; 根据欧洲法规,MCOT可以为13ms或者10ms;根据第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partner Project,3GPP)标准协议,MCOT具体取值与LBT的优先级有关,具体数值可以为2ms,4ms,6ms,8ms或者10ms;在60GHz频段,根据欧洲法规,MCOT可以为9ms。For convenience of description, in the present application, the time range of the above limitation is referred to as a maximum channel occupancy time (MCOT). The specific value of the MCOT is related to local regulations or, in addition, to the definition of the standard. For example, in the 5 GHz band, according to Japanese regulations, MCOT can be 4 ms; according to European regulations, MCOT can be 13 ms or 10 ms; according to the 3rd Generation Partner Project (3GPP) standard protocol, MCOT specific value and LBT The priority value can be 2ms, 4ms, 6ms, 8ms or 10ms; in the 60GHz band, according to European regulations, MCOT can be 9ms.
上述过程中,检测信道是否空闲可以通过信号检测、能量检测等方式来实现。具体地,如果检测信道是否空闲是通过信号检测,那么相应地,如果没有检测到特定的信号(例如针对Wi-Fi系统,该特定的信号可以是前导Preamble),则可以认为信道空闲,此时,检测设备可以利用免许可频段进行数据传输;如果是采用能量检测,则如果接收到或检测到的能量低于某个门限值,则也可以认为信道空闲,同样地,此时,检测设备可以利用免许可频段进行数据传输。In the above process, whether the channel is idle or not can be realized by means of signal detection, energy detection, and the like. Specifically, if the detection channel is idle or not, the signal is detected, and accordingly, if a specific signal is not detected (for example, for a Wi-Fi system, the specific signal may be a preamble Preamble), the channel may be considered idle. The detecting device can use the unlicensed frequency band for data transmission; if energy detection is used, if the received or detected energy is below a certain threshold, the channel can be considered as idle, and likewise, at this time, the detecting device Data can be transferred using the unlicensed band.
在有LBT约束的地域,要求使用免许可频段的设备在利用免许可频段进行数据传输之前,都需要先检测信道是否空闲,也就是说,在免许可频段上的数据传输是机会性的。在未来的第五代(the 5th generation,5G)通信系统中,基于新无线(new radio,NR)的通信系统也可以使用免许可频段资源进行数据通信。In areas with LBT constraints, devices requiring unlicensed bands need to detect whether the channel is idle before using the unlicensed band for data transmission. That is, data transmission on the unlicensed band is opportunistic. In the future 5th generation (5G) communication system, a new radio (NR) based communication system can also use unlicensed band resources for data communication.
本申请的实施例提供一种数据传输格式的传输方法,如图4所示,该传输方法可以应用于图1所示的网络架构,该方法中的接入网设备可以应用于图2的结构示意图,终端设备可以应用于图3的结构示意图。本申请实施例提供的方法以免许可频段的数据传输为例,但是本申请实施例提供的方法并不局限于免许可频段,该传输方法包括如下步骤:An embodiment of the present application provides a data transmission format transmission method. As shown in FIG. 4, the transmission method may be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1. The access network device in the method may be applied to the structure of FIG. Schematically, the terminal device can be applied to the structural diagram of FIG. The method provided by the embodiment of the present application is exemplified by the data transmission of the licensed band. However, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the unlicensed band, and the method includes the following steps:
步骤401、终端设备确定和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的第一系统参数或第二系统参数。Step 401: The terminal device determines a first system parameter or a second system parameter used when the access network device performs data transmission.
这里,第一系统参数和第二系统参数均为终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时可以使用的系统参数(numerology),系统参数在本申请实施例中包括子载波间隔(subcarrier spacing,SCS)和/或时隙持续时间(slot duration)。例如,5G NR系统是可以支持多种子载波间隔SCS的通信系统,每个时隙(slot)的时长或持续时间(duration)与子载波的大小相关。值得注意的是,本申请的实施例提供的方法只是以5G NR系统为例,但是并不局限于5G NR系统,任何支持多个系统参数的系统都可以适用。Here, the first system parameter and the second system parameter are system parameters (numerology) that can be used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, and the system parameters include subcarrier spacing (SCS) in the embodiment of the present application. And/or slot duration. For example, a 5G NR system is a communication system that can support multiple subcarrier spacing SCSs, and the duration or duration of each slot is related to the size of the subcarriers. It should be noted that the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is only a 5G NR system, but is not limited to the 5G NR system, and any system supporting multiple system parameters can be applied.
表1示出了NR系统中,可以支持的子载波间隔与对应的时隙时长的对应表。从表1中可以看出,NR系统至少可以支持6种SCS(kHz),分别对应6种不同的时隙时长(ms)。一般情况下,对应同一种系统参数包括的SCS和slot duration,SCS间隔越大,对应的slot duration越小。我们将不同的SCS作为系统参数的一种,即表1中从第二行到第七行中的每一行都可以看为系统参数的一种。Table 1 shows a correspondence table of subcarrier spacings that can be supported and corresponding slot durations in the NR system. As can be seen from Table 1, the NR system can support at least 6 SCS (kHz), corresponding to 6 different time slot durations (ms). In general, corresponding to the SCS and slot duration included in the same system parameter, the larger the SCS interval, the smaller the corresponding slot duration. We use different SCS as one of the system parameters, that is, each of the rows from the second row to the seventh row in Table 1 can be regarded as one of the system parameters.
表1不同SCS与Slot duration之间的对应表Table 1 Correspondence table between different SCS and Slot duration
SCS(kHz)SCS (kHz) slot duration(ms)Slot duration(ms)
1515 11
3030 0.50.5
6060 0.250.25
120120 0.1250.125
240240 0.06250.0625
480480 0.031250.03125
根据表1可知,15kHz、30kHz、60kHz的SCS对应的时隙时长分别为1ms、0.5ms和0.25ms,其SCS与对应的不同时隙时长的示意图如图5中所示。According to Table 1, the time slots corresponding to the SCSs of 15 kHz, 30 kHz, and 60 kHz are 1 ms, 0.5 ms, and 0.25 ms, respectively, and the schematic diagrams of the SCSs and corresponding different time slots are as shown in FIG. 5 .
在本申请实施方法中,终端设备可以通过如下方式确定该终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的系统参数。这里的数据传输包括控制数据传输和/或业务数据传输,其中,控制数据传输和业务数据传输对应的系统参数可以相同,也可以不同。In the implementation method of the present application, the terminal device may determine system parameters used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission by using the following manner. The data transmission here includes control data transmission and/or service data transmission, wherein the system parameters corresponding to the control data transmission and the service data transmission may be the same or different.
(1)预设准则。例如,终端设备与接入网设备建立无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)链接之后,可以将接入该接入网设备时检测到的同步信道和/或广播信道所对应的系统参数作为终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的系统参数。终端设备可以通过盲检测的方式确定检测到的同步信道和/或广播信道所对应的系统参数。(1) Pre-set criteria. For example, after the terminal device establishes a radio resource control (RRC) link with the access network device, the system parameter corresponding to the synchronization channel and/or the broadcast channel detected when accessing the access network device may be used as the terminal. System parameters used by the device and the access network device for data transmission. The terminal device can determine the system parameters corresponding to the detected synchronization channel and/or the broadcast channel by means of blind detection.
(2)高层信令。例如,终端设备在接入接入网设备时,可以通过高层广播信令或者用户特定的高层信令,确定接入网设备和终端设备进行数据传输时使用的系统参数。高层广播信令可以包括通过广播信道发送的信令,例如同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)中包括的控制信息、剩余最小系统信息(remaining minimum system information,RMSI)中包括的控制信息、可选系统信息(optional system information,OSI)中包括的控制信息、基于需求的系统信息(on-demand system information)中包括的控制信息等。用户特定的高层信令例如可以包括RRC信令。(2) High-level signaling. For example, when accessing the access network device, the terminal device can determine the system parameters used by the access network device and the terminal device for data transmission through high-level broadcast signaling or user-specific high-level signaling. The high layer broadcast signaling may include signaling transmitted through a broadcast channel, such as control information included in a synchronization signal block (SSB), control information included in remaining minimum system information (RMSI), The control information included in the optional system information (OSI), the control information included in the on-demand system information, and the like are selected. User-specific higher layer signaling may include, for example, RRC signaling.
(3)物理层信令。例如,终端设备和接入网设备建立RRC链接之后,可以通过物理层信令,确定接入网设备和终端设备进行数据传输时使用的系统参数。物理层信令可以包括通过物理层信道发送的信令,例如物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)。该物理层信令可以是公共物理层信令,也可以是终端设备特定的物理层信令,其中终端设备特定的物理层信令是通过终端设备特定的无线网络标识(radio network temporary identifier,RNTI)加扰的信令。(3) Physical layer signaling. For example, after the terminal device and the access network device establish an RRC link, the system parameters used by the access network device and the terminal device for data transmission may be determined through physical layer signaling. The physical layer signaling may include signaling sent through a physical layer channel, such as a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). The physical layer signaling may be public physical layer signaling, or may be terminal device specific physical layer signaling, where the terminal device specific physical layer signaling is a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) specific to the terminal device. ) Scrambled signaling.
(4)介质访问控制(media access control,MAC)信令。MAC信令可以通过物理层数据业务信道例如通过物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)来发送。(4) Media access control (MAC) signaling. The MAC signaling may be transmitted through a physical layer data traffic channel, for example, through a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
步骤402、接入网设备确定发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。Step 402: The access network device determines the number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data.
其中,发送和/或接收数据的时间单元表示在该时间单元内,接入网设备发送给终端设备数据,以及终端设备发送给接入网设备数据。The time unit for transmitting and/or receiving data indicates that the access network device sends the data to the terminal device in the time unit, and the terminal device sends the data to the access network device.
在本申请实施例中,一个时间单元可以理解为NR系统中的一个时隙。为了简化描述,在如下描述中,均使用时隙进行描述。但需要说明的是,本申请实施方式并不局限于此,也可以适用于其他表示形式的时间单元。In the embodiment of the present application, a time unit can be understood as a time slot in the NR system. In order to simplify the description, in the following description, time slots are used for description. It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application are not limited thereto, and may be applied to time units of other representations.
接入网设备确定发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数,还可以理解为,接入网设备确定 发送和/或接收数据的数据传输时长。这是因为,如果时隙的持续时间是确知的或者是固定的,则接入网设备确定发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数,等价于接入网设备确定了发送和/或接收数据的数据传输时长,其中发送数据传输时长也可以理解为下行数据传输时长或者下行数据传输时间段,接收数据传输时长也可以理解为上行数据传输时长或者上行数据传输时间段。The access network device determines the number of time slots for transmitting and/or receiving data. It can also be understood that the access network device determines the length of data transmission for transmitting and/or receiving data. This is because, if the duration of the time slot is known or fixed, the access network device determines the number of time slots in which the data is transmitted and/or received, equivalent to the access network device determining the transmission and/or The data transmission duration of the received data, wherein the transmission data transmission duration can also be understood as the downlink data transmission duration or the downlink data transmission period, and the received data transmission duration can also be understood as the uplink data transmission duration or the uplink data transmission period.
接入网设备在竞争到免许可频段资源之后,可以根据上下行数据传输需求,自适应地确定免许可频段上用于下行数据传输和上行数据传输的时间段。为了便于描述,在上一个MCOT内,接入网设备用于下行数据发送和上行数据传输的时间段,可以看为一次帧结构。由于接入网设备可以自适应地选择帧结构模式,因此,接入网设备进行数据传输(包括发送和/或接收)时在免许可频段上的帧结构也是灵活的。After competing for the unlicensed band resources, the access network device can adaptively determine the time period for the downlink data transmission and the uplink data transmission on the unlicensed band according to the uplink and downlink data transmission requirements. For convenience of description, in the previous MCOT, the time period in which the access network device is used for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission may be regarded as a frame structure. Since the access network device can adaptively select the frame structure mode, the frame structure on the unlicensed band when the access network device performs data transmission (including transmission and/or reception) is also flexible.
图6示出了一种帧结构的示意图,图7示出了另一种帧结构示意图。其中图6适用于上行链路数据传输多、下行链路数据传输少的业务传输,例如当接入网设备竞争到免许可频段资源之后,如果待调度传输的上行业务(对应上行链路数据)负载较大,则接入网设备可以在限制的时间范围内,利用1个时隙(slot)用于下行数据传输(例如发送上行调度控制信息等),然后剩余时隙都用于接收终端设备发送的上行数据。FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of a frame structure, and FIG. 7 shows another frame structure diagram. Figure 6 is applicable to service transmissions with multiple uplink data transmissions and less downlink data transmission, for example, if the access network equipment competes for the unlicensed frequency band resources, if the uplink service to be scheduled for transmission (corresponding to uplink data) If the load is large, the access network device can use one slot for downlink data transmission (for example, sending uplink scheduling control information, etc.) within a limited time range, and then the remaining time slots are used for receiving the terminal device. The uplink data sent.
图7适用于更加动态灵活变化的业务传输,图7中每个时隙包括的下行数据传输部分和上行数据传输部分都可以互不相同,这样的设计更加适配于业务以时隙为粒度进行变化的场景。例如接入网设备在发送下行数据之后,希望尽快接收到终端设备发送的反馈信息,在这种情况下,可以使用自包含(self-contained)的时隙结构(如图7中的第三个slot的时隙结构)。Figure 7 is applicable to more dynamic and flexible service transmission. The downlink data transmission part and the uplink data transmission part included in each time slot in Figure 7 can be different from each other. This design is more suitable for the service to be slotted. Changing scenes. For example, after the downlink network device sends the downlink data, it hopes to receive the feedback information sent by the terminal device as soon as possible. In this case, a self-contained slot structure can be used (such as the third in FIG. 7). The slot structure of the slot).
在本申请实施例中,具有自包含时隙结构的时隙,是指该时隙中同时包括用于下行数据传输的正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号和用于上行数据传输的OFDM符号。特别地,如果一个时隙中的下行数据传输部分包含调度终端设备传输上行数据的控制信息,则该调度信息调度的上行数据传输可以在该时隙包括的上行数据传输部分;或者,如果一个时隙中的下行数据传输部分如果包括发送给终端设备的业务数据,则该终端设备针对该业务数据的上行反馈信息,可以在该时隙包括的上行数据传输部分。这里的上行反馈信息可以包括混合自动重传请求应答(hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement,HARQ-ACK),其中HARQ-ACK可以包括确认应答(acknowledgment,ACK)和非确认应答(negative acknowledgment,NACK)。In the embodiment of the present application, a time slot having a self-contained slot structure means that the time slot includes orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols for downlink data transmission and is used for uplink. OFDM symbol for data transmission. Specifically, if the downlink data transmission part in one time slot includes control information for scheduling the terminal device to transmit uplink data, the uplink data transmission scheduled by the scheduling information may be in an uplink data transmission part included in the time slot; or, if one If the downlink data transmission part in the slot includes the service data sent to the terminal device, the uplink feedback information of the terminal device for the service data may be in the uplink data transmission part included in the time slot. The uplink feedback information may include a hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK), where the HARQ-ACK may include an acknowledgement (ACK) and a negative acknowledgement (NACK).
需要说明的是,结合接入网设备在免许可频段上帧结构特征,在本申请实施例中,接入网设备确定的发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数,可以包括如下几种不同理解:接入网设备用于发送数据的时隙个数(下行时隙个数),接入网设备用于接收数据的时隙个数(上行时隙个数),接入网设备用于发送数据的时隙和用于接收数据的时隙个数总和,接入网设备用于发送和接收数据的时隙个数(这里的时隙包括用于下行数据传输和上行数据传输接收的部分)。以图6为例,在所示出的时间范围内,下行时隙个数为1个,上行时隙个数为5个,用于发送数据的时隙和用于接收数据的时隙个数总和为6个,用于发送和接收数据的时隙个数为0个。以图7为例,在所示出的时间范围内,下行时隙个数为1个,上行时隙个数为1个,用于发送和接收数据的时隙个数 为4个,只用于发送数据的时隙和只用于接收数据的时隙个数总和为2个。此外。在NR系统中,一个时隙内包括的数据传输部分除了下行数据传输部分,上行数据传输部分,还可以包括“未知(unknown)”部分。一个时隙的持续时间内可以都是unknown,也可以只有一部分时间是unknown的。在本申请实施例中,为了简化描述,如果一个时隙内只包括unknown部分和上行数据传输部分,则该时隙可以看为一个上行时隙;如果一个时隙内只包括unknown部分和下行数据传输部分,则该时隙可以看为一个下行时隙;如果一个时隙内既包括上行数据传输部分和下行数据传输部分,还包括Unknown部分,则该时隙可以看为一个用于发送数据和接收数据的时隙。It should be noted that, in combination with the frame structure feature of the access network device in the unlicensed frequency band, in the embodiment of the present application, the number of time slots for transmitting and/or receiving data determined by the access network device may include the following different types. It is understood that the number of time slots (the number of downlink time slots) used by the access network device to transmit data, and the number of time slots (the number of uplink time slots) used by the access network device to receive data are used by the access network device. The sum of the time slot of the transmitted data and the number of time slots for receiving data, and the number of time slots used by the access network device to transmit and receive data (the time slot here includes the part for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission reception) ). Taking FIG. 6 as an example, in the time range shown, the number of downlink time slots is one, the number of uplink time slots is five, the time slot for transmitting data, and the number of time slots for receiving data. The sum is six, and the number of time slots for transmitting and receiving data is zero. Taking FIG. 7 as an example, in the time range shown, the number of downlink time slots is one, the number of uplink time slots is one, and the number of time slots for transmitting and receiving data is four, and only The sum of the time slot for transmitting data and the number of time slots for receiving data only is two. Also. In the NR system, the data transmission portion included in one slot may include an "unknown" portion in addition to the downlink data transmission portion and the uplink data transmission portion. The duration of a time slot can be unknown, or only part of the time is unknown. In the embodiment of the present application, in order to simplify the description, if only one unknown part and an uplink data transmission part are included in one time slot, the time slot can be regarded as one uplink time slot; if only one unknown part and downlink data are included in one time slot In the transmission part, the time slot can be regarded as a downlink time slot; if a time slot includes both an uplink data transmission part and a downlink data transmission part, and an Unknown part, the time slot can be regarded as one for transmitting data and The time slot in which data is received.
步骤403、接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。Step 403: The access network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data.
可选的,在本申请实施方法中,用于指示时间单元(例如时隙)个数的第一指示信息可以具有如下形式:Optionally, in the implementation method of the present application, the first indication information used to indicate the number of time units (eg, time slots) may have the following form:
(1)第一指示信息可以直接指示时隙个数。(1) The first indication information may directly indicate the number of slots.
第一指示信息所指示的时隙个数中包括每个时隙对应的传输结构(例如用于下行数据传输,还是用于上行数据传输,还是既用于下行数据传输也用于上行数据传输,还是属于未知状态)。该传输结构可以通过第一指示信息来指示,也可以通过其他指示信息来指示。例如,第一指示信息指示时隙个数为5,然后接入网设备可以通过第一指示信息或者其他指示信息,指示这5个时隙中的全部时隙或者部分时隙对应的传输结构。The number of time slots indicated by the first indication information includes a transmission structure corresponding to each time slot (for example, for downlink data transmission, for uplink data transmission, or for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission, Still belongs to the unknown state). The transmission structure may be indicated by the first indication information, or may be indicated by other indication information. For example, the first indication information indicates that the number of time slots is 5, and then the access network device may indicate, by using the first indication information or other indication information, a transmission structure corresponding to all time slots or partial time slots of the five time slots.
(2)第一指示信息指示时隙对应的传输结构。(2) The first indication information indicates a transmission structure corresponding to the time slot.
根据时隙对应的不同传输结构,终端设备可以确定出不同传输结构对应的时隙个数,即终端设备可以确定出接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数。基于此,也可以理解为,第一指示信息用于指示接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。例如第一指示信息指示时隙对应的传输结构具有如下表示形式或者说第一指示信息指示的内容为:[下行时隙 下行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙]则终端设备可以确定出接入网设备发送数据的时隙个数为2个,接收数据的时隙个数为4个。According to different transmission structures corresponding to the time slots, the terminal device can determine the number of time slots corresponding to different transmission structures, that is, the terminal device can determine the number of time slots for the access network device to send and/or receive data. Based on this, it can also be understood that the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data. For example, the first indication information indicates that the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot has the following representation or the content indicated by the first indication information is: [downlink time slot, downlink time slot, uplink time slot, uplink time slot, uplink time slot, uplink time slot], then the terminal device It can be determined that the number of time slots for transmitting data by the access network device is two, and the number of time slots for receiving data is four.
(3)第一指示信息指示接入网设备和终端设备进行数据传输的传输时长。(3) The first indication information indicates a transmission duration of the data transmission by the access network device and the terminal device.
终端设备可以根据该传输时长,以及参考和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的系统参数对应的时隙持续时长,确定出接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数。基于此,也可以理解为,第一指示信息用于指示接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。例如,第一指示信息指示用于上行数据传输(或者接入网设备接收数据)的传输时长为4毫秒(millisecond,ms),且终端设备和接入网设备之间的上行数据传输使用的系统参数对应的时隙传输时长为0.5ms(SCS可以为30kHz),则终端设备可以确定出接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数为4/0.5=8个。The terminal device may determine the number of time slots for the access network device to send and/or receive data according to the transmission duration and the duration of the time slot corresponding to the system parameter used when the access network device performs data transmission. Based on this, it can also be understood that the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data. For example, the first indication information indicates a system for uplink data transmission (or access network device receiving data) with a transmission duration of 4 milliseconds (millisecond, ms), and uplink data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device. The time slot corresponding to the parameter transmission time is 0.5 ms (the SCS can be 30 kHz), and the terminal device can determine that the number of time units for receiving data by the access network device is 4/0.5=8.
需要说明的是,无论第一指示信息采用什么样的表示形式,第一指示信息可以直接指示上述内容,也可以间接指示。间接指示,可以包括第一指示信息用来指示一个索引信息,该索引信息与高层信令(例如RRC信令)配置的内容相关联。例如第一指示信息可以包括2个bit,一共可以对应4种不同的指示内容,这4种不同的指示内容 可以是RRC信令实现配置好的。It should be noted that, regardless of the representation form of the first indication information, the first indication information may directly indicate the above content, or may be indirectly indicated. The indirect indication may include the first indication information used to indicate an index information associated with the content of the high layer signaling (eg, RRC signaling) configuration. For example, the first indication information may include two bits, and a total of four different indication contents may be corresponding to each other. The four different indication contents may be configured by using RRC signaling.
更为具体地,第一指示信息可以为公共控制信息,承载在下行公共控制信道中。例如第一指示信息可以为NR系统中时隙结构指示(slot format indicator,SFI),承载在组公共物理下行控制信道(group common physical downlink control channel,group common PDCCH)。该SFI可以指示一个时隙结构,也可以指示多个时隙结构。特别地,当SFI指示多个时隙结构时,可以看为SFI指示接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。More specifically, the first indication information may be public control information and carried in a downlink common control channel. For example, the first indication information may be a slot format indicator (SFI) in the NR system, and is carried in a group common physical downlink control channel (group common PDCCH). The SFI may indicate a slot structure or may indicate multiple slot structures. In particular, when the SFI indicates a plurality of slot structures, it can be seen that the SFI indicates the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data.
步骤404、终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第一指示信息。Step 404: The terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the access network device.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例提供的方法中,步骤401、402的标号并不限定先后顺序,也就是说,步骤401可以在步骤402之前执行,也可以在步骤402之后执行。同样,步骤401可以在步骤404之前执行,也可以在步骤404之后执行。It should be noted that, in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the labels of the steps 401 and 402 do not limit the sequence, that is, the step 401 may be performed before step 402 or may be performed after step 402. Likewise, step 401 can be performed prior to step 404 or after step 404.
步骤405、终端设备根据第一指示信息,确定所述时间单元个数。Step 405: The terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, the number of the time units.
其中,所述时间单元个数具有如下特征:当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素。The number of the time units has the following characteristics: when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the number of the time units is An element included in a set; or, when the terminal device determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is in the second set. Elements included.
其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应,所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,M大于N,N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。The first set corresponds to the first system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter, and the first set includes at least one M value, where M is greater than N, and N is a maximum value in the second set, and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
需要说明的是,优选地,这里的M和N值对应的时间单元具有相同的时间单元结构。例如,M值对应的为用于上行数据传输的时间单元,则N值对应的也为用于上行数据传输的时间单元;M值对应的为用于下行数据传输的时间单元,则N值对应也为用于下行数据传输的时间单元;M值对应的为用于下行数据传输的时间单元和用于上行数据传输的时间单元个数的总和,则N对应的也为用于下行数据传输的时间单元和用于上行数据传输的时间单元个数的总和。It should be noted that, preferably, the time units corresponding to the M and N values herein have the same time unit structure. For example, the M value corresponds to a time unit for uplink data transmission, and the N value corresponds to a time unit for uplink data transmission; the M value corresponds to a time unit for downlink data transmission, and the N value corresponds to It is also a time unit for downlink data transmission; the M value corresponds to the sum of the time unit for downlink data transmission and the number of time units for uplink data transmission, and N corresponding to the downlink data transmission is also used. The sum of the time unit and the number of time units used for upstream data transmission.
在NR通信系统中,如果接入网设备使用每个时隙的SFI通知当前时隙的结构,使终端设备获知与接入网设备进行数据传输的传输时长,则显然信令开销大,特别是,当连续的几个时隙结构相同的时候。而本申请实施例提供的方法是在保证信令开销的情况下,有效通知频段上的帧结构,使终端设备获知数据传输的传输时长。In the NR communication system, if the access network device uses the SFI of each time slot to notify the structure of the current time slot, so that the terminal device learns the transmission time of the data transmission with the access network device, it is obvious that the signaling overhead is large, especially When several consecutive time slots have the same structure. The method provided by the embodiment of the present application effectively informs the frame structure on the frequency band when the signaling overhead is ensured, so that the terminal device knows the transmission duration of the data transmission.
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的一种指示传输时长的示意图,其中,时间单元以上行传输的时隙为例,时隙的持续时间以1ms为粒度进行度量,相应地,终端设备以1ms为单位来获得传输时长。例如,第一指示信息中包括L个比特(bit)用于指示传输时长,L为正整数。在本申请实施例中,L个比特的信息可以是预配置的或者是接入网设备使用高层信令配置的,这里的高层信令可以是高层广播信令,也可以是RRC信令。例如接入网设备在配置包括L个比特的控制信息时,可以配置L的具体值。这里L个比特的信息,可以包括以下至少一项:FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of indicating a transmission duration according to an embodiment of the present application, where a time slot of a time unit is transmitted as an example, and a duration of the time slot is measured by using a granularity of 1 ms. Accordingly, the terminal device The transmission time is obtained in units of 1 ms. For example, the first indication information includes L bits for indicating the transmission duration, and L is a positive integer. In the embodiment of the present application, the information of the L bits may be pre-configured or configured by the access network device using high layer signaling, where the high layer signaling may be high layer broadcast signaling or RRC signaling. For example, when the access network device configures control information including L bits, the specific value of L can be configured. Here, the L bits of information may include at least one of the following:
L个比特控制信息的大小(例如原始信息比特数目);L bits control the size of the information (for example, the number of original information bits);
承载包括L个比特的控制信息的控制信道所在的时频资源范围;该时频资源范围 例如可以使用控制资源集合(control resource set,CORESET)表示;a time-frequency resource range in which a control channel including L bits of control information is carried; the time-frequency resource range may be represented by, for example, a control resource set (CORESET);
L个比特的控制信息所使用的无线网络临时标识(radio network tempory indentity,RNTI)。Radio network tempory indentation (RNTI) used for L bits of control information.
L个bit可以表示为2 L个状态,其所对应的数值构成集合{1,2,……,2 L}。终端设备接收到接入网设备发送的第一指示信息,可以确定该第一指示信息中L个bit构成的集合中的某个数值Y,确定传输时长。其中Y可以是由接入网设备预先配置的。 The L bits can be represented as 2 L states, and the corresponding values constitute the set {1, 2, ..., 2 L }. The terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the access network device, and determines a certain value Y in the set of L bits in the first indication information, and determines the transmission duration. Where Y may be pre-configured by the access network device.
终端设备可以根据公式1来确定接入网发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数对应的传输时长,即终端设备可以根据第一指示信息中的Y、实际使用的SCS(第一系统参数)和参考SCS(第二系统参数),确定接入网发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数对应的传输时长D:The terminal device may determine, according to the formula 1, the transmission duration corresponding to the number of slots in which the access network transmits and/or receives data, that is, the terminal device may use the S in the first indication information, the actually used SCS (first system parameter). And referring to the SCS (second system parameter), determining the transmission duration D corresponding to the number of slots in which the access network transmits and/or receives data:
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000005
其中,k为实际使用的SCS对应的slot duration。如前所述,在本申请实施例中,确定了传输时长就可以确定时间单元个数。Where k is the slot duration corresponding to the actually used SCS. As described above, in the embodiment of the present application, the number of time units can be determined by determining the transmission duration.
以参考SCS为15kHz,Y=3为例。Take the reference SCS as 15 kHz and Y=3 as an example.
当实际使用的SCS为15kHz时,根据表1可知,该SCS下对应的slot duration为1ms,即k=1ms。终端设备根据公式1确定D=3×(15kHz/15kHz)×1ms=3ms。When the actually used SCS is 15 kHz, according to Table 1, the corresponding slot duration under the SCS is 1 ms, that is, k=1 ms. The terminal device determines D = 3 × (15 kHz / 15 kHz) × 1 ms = 3 ms according to Formula 1.
当实际使用的SCS为30kHz时,该SCS下对应的slot duration为0.5ms,即k=0.5ms。终端设备根据公式1确定D=3×(30kHz/15kHz)×0.5ms=3ms。When the actually used SCS is 30 kHz, the corresponding slot duration under the SCS is 0.5 ms, that is, k=0.5 ms. The terminal device determines D = 3 × (30 kHz / 15 kHz) × 0.5 ms = 3 ms according to Formula 1.
当实际使用的SCS为60kHz时,k=0.25ms,终端设备根据公式1确定D=3×(60kHz/15kHz)×0.25ms=3ms。When the actually used SCS is 60 kHz, k = 0.25 ms, the terminal device determines D = 3 × (60 kHz / 15 kHz) × 0.25 ms = 3 ms according to Formula 1.
在本申请提供的另一实施例中,终端设备还可以根据公式2来确定传输时长,即终端设备可以根据第一指示信息中的Y和对应的slot duration 1ms(第二系统参数)确定接入网发送和/或接收数据的时隙个数对应的传输时长:In another embodiment provided by the present application, the terminal device may further determine the transmission duration according to Equation 2, that is, the terminal device may determine the access according to Y in the first indication information and the corresponding slot duration 1 ms (second system parameter). The transmission duration corresponding to the number of slots in which the network transmits and/or receives data:
D=Y×1ms   (公式2)D=Y×1ms (Equation 2)
其中,Y如前描述,为集合{1,2,……,2 L}中的一个值。如前所述,在本申请实施例中,确定了传输时长就可以确定时间单元个数。 Where Y is as described above and is a value in the set {1, 2, ..., 2 L }. As described above, in the embodiment of the present application, the number of time units can be determined by determining the transmission duration.
仍然以Y=3为例。Still take Y=3 as an example.
当实际使用的SCS为15kHz、30kHz或60kHz时,终端设备根据公式2确定D=3×1ms=3ms。When the actually used SCS is 15 kHz, 30 kHz, or 60 kHz, the terminal device determines D = 3 × 1 ms = 3 ms according to Formula 2.
假设第一系统参数对应的duration集合中包括P个元素,其中每个元素都可以用I i×t1表示,其中I i为自然数,且i=1,2,……,P;t1为第一系统参数中的slot duration。这里,I i也可以理解为接入网设备和终端设备进行数据传输使用第一系统参数时,接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数对应的第一时隙个数,其中第一时隙为第一系统参数对应的时隙。例如,当第一系统参数中的子载波间隔为60kHz时,第一系统参数对应的第一时隙具有如下特征:slot duration为0.25ms的时隙可以看为第一时隙。需要说明的是,这里第一系统参数对应的duration集合,可以理解为,当接入网设备和终端设备进行数据传输使用第一系统参数时,接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元的传输时长构成的集合,其中I i(i=1,2,……,P)构成的集合可以理解为本申 请实施例中的第一集合,I i可以理解为当终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输使用第一系统参数时,接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。 It is assumed that the duration set corresponding to the first system parameter includes P elements, wherein each element can be represented by I i × t1, where I i is a natural number, and i=1, 2, ..., P; t1 is the first The slot duration in the system parameters. Here, I i can also be understood as the number of first time slots corresponding to the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data when the access network device and the terminal device perform data transmission using the first system parameter, where The first time slot is a time slot corresponding to the first system parameter. For example, when the subcarrier spacing in the first system parameter is 60 kHz, the first time slot corresponding to the first system parameter has the following feature: a slot with a slot duration of 0.25 ms can be regarded as the first time slot. It should be noted that the duration set corresponding to the first system parameter herein can be understood as a time unit in which the access network device sends and/or receives data when the access network device and the terminal device perform data transmission using the first system parameter. The set of transmission durations, where the set of I i (i=1, 2, . . . , P) can be understood as the first set in the embodiment of the present application, and I i can be understood as the terminal device and the access network. The number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data when the device performs data transmission using the first system parameter.
另一方面,假设第二系统参数对应的duration集合中包括Q个元素,其中每个元素都可以用J j×t2表示,其中J j为自然数,且j=1,2,……,Q,t2为第二系统参数对应的slot duration。这里,同理,J j也可以理解为接入网设备和终端设备进行数据传输使用第二系统参数时,接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数对应的第二时隙个数,其中第二时隙为第二系统参数对应的时隙。需要说明的是,这里第二系统参数对应的duration集合,可以理解为,当接入网设备和终端设备进行数据传输使用第二系统参数时,接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的传输时长构成的集合,其中J j(j=1,2,……,Q)构成的集合可以理解为本申请实施例中的第二集合,J j可以理解为当终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输使用第二系统参数时,接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。 On the other hand, it is assumed that the duration set corresponding to the second system parameter includes Q elements, each of which can be represented by J j × t2, where J j is a natural number, and j=1, 2, ..., Q, T2 is the slot duration corresponding to the second system parameter. Here, for the same reason, J j can also be understood as the second time slot corresponding to the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data when the access network device and the terminal device perform data transmission using the second system parameter. The number, wherein the second time slot is a time slot corresponding to the second system parameter. It should be noted that the duration set corresponding to the second system parameter herein can be understood as the transmission duration of the data transmitted and/or received by the access network device when the access network device and the terminal device use the second system parameter for data transmission. The set of constituents, wherein the set of J j (j=1, 2, . . . , Q) can be understood as the second set in the embodiment of the present application, and J j can be understood as the data is performed by the terminal device and the access network device. The number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data when the second system parameter is transmitted.
假设J max为J j中的最大自然数,即J max为第二集合中的最大值,则第一系统参数对应的duration集合中至少包括一个元素,假设该元素用I x×t1表示,其中I x为第一集合中的一个值。则使用本申请实施例提供的方法,I x>J max,其中第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔大于第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔。即如前所述的,无论接入网设备和终端设备之间数据传输时使用什么类型的系统参数,不同numerology下的传输时长指示的结果是接近的或者是完全相同的,基于此,如果第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔大于第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔,则第一系统参数对应的slot duration小于第二系统参数对应的slot duration,则第一系统参数对应的duration集合中至少包括一个元素,该元素对应的第一时隙的个数一定大于第二系统参数对应的duration集合中包括的最大元素对应的第二时隙个数,则与第一系统参数相对应的第一集合中包括至少一个大于与第二系统参数相对应的第二集合中的最大值的值。 Assuming that J max is the largest natural number in J j , that is, J max is the maximum value in the second set, the duration set corresponding to the first system parameter includes at least one element, and the element is assumed to be represented by I x ×t1, where I x is a value in the first set. Then, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, I x >J max , wherein the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter is greater than the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter. That is, as described above, no matter what type of system parameter is used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the transmission duration indication under different numerology is close or identical, based on this, if If the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the system parameter is greater than the sub-carrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter, the slot duration corresponding to the first system parameter is smaller than the slot duration corresponding to the second system parameter, and the duration set corresponding to the first system parameter includes at least An element, the number of the first time slots corresponding to the element is greater than the number of the second time slots corresponding to the largest element included in the duration set corresponding to the second system parameter, and the first corresponding to the first system parameter The set includes at least one value greater than a maximum value in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter.
例如,假设第一系统参数对应的SCS为60kHz,第二系统参数对应的SCS为15kHz,第一指示信息中包括L个bit用来指示传输时长,则当接入网设备和终端设备之间数据传输使用第二系统参数时,所能指示的传输时长的最大值为2 L×t2(当第二系统参数对应的SCS为15kHz时,对应的slot duration t2为1ms),这里的2 L可以对应前述的J max。另外一方面,当接入网设备和终端设备之间数据传输使用第一系统参数时,所能指示的传输时长可以为以下中的一项: For example, if the SCS corresponding to the first system parameter is 60 kHz, the SCS corresponding to the second system parameter is 15 kHz, and the first indication information includes L bits for indicating the transmission duration, then the data between the access network device and the terminal device When the second system parameter is used for transmission, the maximum value of the transmission duration that can be indicated is 2 L × t2 (when the SCS corresponding to the second system parameter is 15 kHz, the corresponding slot duration t2 is 1 ms), where 2 L can correspond to The aforementioned J max . On the other hand, when the first system parameter is used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the transmission duration that can be indicated may be one of the following:
1×t1,2×t1,……,
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000007
1×t1, 2×t1, ...,
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000007
当第一系统参数对应的SCS为60kHz,对应的slot duration t1为0.25ms(参考表1),则所能指示的传输时长可以为以下中的一项:When the SCS corresponding to the first system parameter is 60 kHz and the corresponding slot duration t1 is 0.25 ms (refer to Table 1), the transmission duration that can be indicated may be one of the following:
1×0.25,2×0.25,……,1×(60kHz/15kHz)×0.25,2×(60kHz/15kHz)×0.25,……,2 L×(60kHz/15kHz)×0.25 1 × 0.25, 2 × 0.25, ..., 1 × (60 kHz / 15 kHz) × 0.25, 2 × (60 kHz / 15 kHz) × 0.25, ..., 2 L × (60 kHz / 15 kHz) × 0.25
这里的1、2、……、1×(60kHz/15kHz)、2×(60kHz/15kHz)、2 L×(60kHz/15kHz)可以对应前述的I i。显然,接入网设备和终端设备之间数据传输使用第一系统参数(SCS为60kHz)所能指示的时间单元的个数中,至少2 L×(60kHz/15kHz)大于接入网设 备和终端设备之间数据传输使用第二系统参数(SCS为15kHz)所能指示的时间单元的个数中的最大值2 LHere, 1, 2, ..., 1 × (60 kHz / 15 kHz), 2 × (60 kHz / 15 kHz), 2 L × (60 kHz / 15 kHz) may correspond to the aforementioned I i . Obviously, at least 2 L × (60 kHz/15 kHz) of the number of time units that can be indicated by the first system parameter (SCS is 60 kHz) for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is greater than the access network device and the terminal. The data transmission between devices uses the maximum value 2 L of the number of time units that can be indicated by the second system parameter (SCS is 15 kHz).
作为上述特点的一个典型例子,I x与J max之间存在一定的比例关系,即I x/J max=S*(第一系统参数对应的SCS/第二系统参数对应的SCS),其中S为正整数。 As a typical example of the above characteristics, there is a certain proportional relationship between I x and J max , that is, I x /J max =S* (the SCS corresponding to the first system parameter/the SCS corresponding to the second system parameter), where S Is a positive integer.
作为上述特征的另外一个典型的例子,使用第一系统参数对应的第一集合中包括的各个元素对应的I i在使用第二系统参数对应的第二集合中,均可以找到与其成比例的J j,其中I i=K1*J j,K1为正整数。或者,使用第二系统参数对应的第二集合中包括的各个元素对应的J j在使用第一系统参数对应的第一集合中,均可以找到与其成比例的I i,其中J j=1/K2*I i,其中K2为正整数。 As another typical example of the above features, I i corresponding to each element included in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter may be found in a second set corresponding to the second system parameter. j , where I i = K1 * J j , and K1 is a positive integer. Alternatively, using the J j corresponding to each element included in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter, in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter, I i can be found, wherein J j =1/ K2*I i , where K2 is a positive integer.
例如,如前所述,假设控制信息中包括2bit用于指示传输时长,那么2bit可以分别对应1,2,3,4,当SCS为15kHz时(假设为第二系统参数),指示的传输时长对应的slot个数(可以理解为J j的取值)分别为1,2,3,4;当SCS为60kHz时(假设为第一系统参数),指示的传输时长对应的slot个数(可以理解为I i的取值)分别为4,8,12,16。基于此,可以观察到,第一系统参数对应的第一集合中包括的各个元素对应的I i与第二系统参数对应的第二集合中包括的各个元素对应的J j之间存在一定的比例关系(例如比例值为4)。 For example, as described above, if the control information includes 2 bits for indicating the transmission duration, then 2 bits can correspond to 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. When the SCS is 15 kHz (assuming the second system parameter), the indicated transmission duration is The number of corresponding slots (which can be understood as the value of J j ) is 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively; when the SCS is 60 kHz (assuming the first system parameter), the number of slots corresponding to the indicated transmission duration (may be It is understood that the value of I i is 4, 8, 12, and 16, respectively. Based on this, it can be observed that there is a certain ratio between the I i corresponding to each element included in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter and the J j corresponding to each element included in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter. Relationship (for example, a scale value of 4).
可选地,在本申请实施例中,第一集合包括的元素个数可以和第二集合包括的元素个数相同,且第一集合可以用{a 1,a 2,…,a w},第二集合可以用{b 1,b 2,…,b w}表示,在这种情况下,
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000008
的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且不大于w的自然数。
Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first set may include the same number of elements as the second set, and the first set may use {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, The second set can be represented by {b 1 , b 2 ,..., b w }, in which case
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000008
The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , and w are positive integers, and i is a natural number greater than 0 and not greater than w.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,第一集合包括的元素个数可以和第二集合包括的元素个数不同,例如第一集合包括的元素个数大于第二集合包括的元素个数,且第一集合可以用{a 1,a 2,…,a x}表示,第二集合可以用{b 1,b 2,…,b y}表示,则第二集合中的元素总能在第一集合中找到与其有固定比例关系的元素,即
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000009
的值为K的整数倍,其中i为大于0且不大于y的自然数,x,y为正整数,x大于y,且集合{a 1,a 2,…,a y}为集合{a 1,a 2,…,a x}的真子集。
Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the number of elements included in the first set may be different from the number of elements included in the second set, for example, the number of elements included in the first set is greater than the number of elements included in the second set, And the first set can be represented by {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a x }, and the second set can be represented by {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b y }, and the elements in the second set can always be in the first Find a set of elements in a set that have a fixed proportional relationship, ie
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000009
The value is an integer multiple of K, where i is a natural number greater than 0 and not greater than y, x, y is a positive integer, x is greater than y, and the set {a 1 , a 2 ,..., a y } is a set {a 1 , a 2 , ..., a x } true subset.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,第一集合包括的元素个数可以和第二集合包括的元素个数不同,例如第一集合包括的元素个数小于第二集合包括的元素个数,且第一集合可以用{a 1,a 2,…,a u}表示,第二集合可以用{b 1,b 2,…,b v}表示,则第一集合中的元素总能在第二集合中找到与其有固定比例关系的元素,即
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000010
的值为K的整数倍,其中i为大于0且不大于u的自然数,u,v为正整数,u小于v,且集合{b 1,b 2,…,b u}为集合{b 1,b 2,…,b v}的真子集。
Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the number of elements included in the first set may be different from the number of elements included in the second set, for example, the number of elements included in the first set is smaller than the number of elements included in the second set, And the first set can be represented by {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a u }, and the second set can be represented by {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b v }, and the elements in the first set can always be in the first Find the elements in the second set that have a fixed proportional relationship with them, ie
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000010
The value is an integer multiple of K, where i is a natural number greater than 0 and not greater than u, u, v is a positive integer, u is less than v, and the set {b 1 , b 2 ,..., b u } is a set {b 1 , true subset of b 2 , ..., b v }.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,第一集合中包括至少一个元素,该元素与第二集合中的至少一个元素之间的比值为K的整数倍,其中K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。例如,第一集合用{a 1,a 2,…,a p}表示,第二集合用{b 1,b 2,…,b q}表示,则第一集合中至少存在一个元素(或数值)a i与第二集中的至少一个元素(或数值)b j之间的比值为K的整数倍。在 此例中,第一集合中的部分元素而非全部元素与第二集合中的部分元素而非全部元素之间有固定的比例关系。 Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first set includes at least one element, and a ratio between the element and at least one element in the second set is an integer multiple of K, where K is the first system parameter. a ratio between a corresponding subcarrier spacing and a subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter. For example, the first set is represented by {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a p }, and the second set is represented by {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b q }, and at least one element (or numerical value) exists in the first set. The ratio between a i and at least one element (or value) b j in the second set is an integer multiple of K. In this example, some of the elements in the first set, rather than all of them, have a fixed proportional relationship with some of the elements in the second set, rather than all of them.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,集合中的数值与集合中的元素,可以理解为相同的概念。It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, the values in the set and the elements in the set can be understood as the same concept.
需要说明的是,如果第一系统参数对应的第一集合中包括的各个元素对应的slot个数均可以在第二系统参数对应的第二集合中找到对应比例的slot个数,那么对于无法与使用第二系统参数进行数据传输确定的slot成比例的传输时长,通过指示信息无法指示,即图8中圈出的部分。It should be noted that if the number of slots corresponding to each element included in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter can be found in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter, the number of slots corresponding to the ratio may be found. The transmission time length of the slot determined by the data transmission using the second system parameter is not indicated by the indication information, that is, the circled portion in FIG.
在图8中,当SCS为30kHz时,传输时长包括的1个slot(0.5ms)无法通过指示信息指示;当SCS为60kHz时,传输时长包括的3个slot(每个slot的传输时长为0.25ms)也无法通过指示信息指示。可选的,可以联合使用时隙格式指示SFI或者终端设备特定的控制信息指示指示信息无法指示的传输时长部分。其中,终端设备特定的控制信息,包括只有特定终端设备可以解调的控制信息,例如使用终端设备特定的RNTI加扰的控制信息。例如,结合图8,当SCS为60kHz时,接入网设备可以使用SFI指示3ms之后有3个上行slot,其中这3个上行slot的指示可以是显示的,这3个上行slot的起始位置(例如这里的3ms之后)的指示可以是显式的,也可以是隐式的。显式的是指SFI中包括一个控制字段专门指示3ms之后,隐式的可以是结合指示信息的指示,终端设备可以默认在第一指示信息指示的duration之后存在SFI(第二指示信息)指示的slot个数。In FIG. 8, when the SCS is 30 kHz, one slot (0.5 ms) included in the transmission duration cannot be indicated by the indication information; when the SCS is 60 kHz, the transmission duration includes three slots (the transmission duration of each slot is 0.25) Ms) is also not indicated by the indication. Optionally, the slot format may be used in combination to indicate that the SFI or the terminal device-specific control information indicates a transmission duration portion that the indication information cannot indicate. The terminal device-specific control information includes control information that only a specific terminal device can demodulate, for example, control information that is scrambled using a terminal device-specific RNTI. For example, in conjunction with FIG. 8, when the SCS is 60 kHz, the access network device can use the SFI to indicate that there are three uplink slots after 3 ms, wherein the indications of the three uplink slots can be displayed, and the starting positions of the three uplink slots. The indication (eg after 3ms here) can be explicit or implicit. Explicitly, after the SFI includes a control field specifically indicating 3ms, the implicit indication may be an indication of the combined indication information, and the terminal device may default to the SFI (second indication information) indication after the duration indicated by the first indication information. The number of slots.
又例如,图8中圈出的时长部分,可以通过终端设备特定的控制信息来指示。如图8中,终端设备特定的控制信息可以在第一个下行slot上发送,由于基于图8的实现方式,上行/下行控制信息所在的时隙与圈出部分的下行/上行时隙之间的时间延迟一般大于最小处理能力,例如大于1个时隙,所以无论终端设备能力如何,都可以通过终端设备特定的控制信息调度在最后几个上行/下行时隙上。For another example, the length of time circled in FIG. 8 can be indicated by terminal device specific control information. As shown in FIG. 8, the terminal device-specific control information may be sent on the first downlink slot. Due to the implementation manner of FIG. 8, the uplink/downlink control information is located between the time slot and the circled/uplink time slot of the circled portion. The time delay is generally greater than the minimum processing capability, for example, greater than one time slot, so that regardless of the capabilities of the terminal device, the terminal device specific control information can be scheduled on the last several uplink/downlink time slots.
图9示出了另一种解决指示信息没有指示全的实现方式,上述描述同样适用于图9。与图8不同的是,指示信息无法指示的时长部分位于下行结束之后开始的1个或几个slot内,即针对30kHz的SCS和60kHz的SCS,图9中圈出的部分。圈出的部分,可以使用显式指示方法,通过指示信息指示,该指示信息可以与指示时长的指示信息承载在同一个下行控制信道中,也可以分别承载;或者也可以使用隐式指示的方法,即终端设备可以默认下行时隙之间与指示信息所指示的时长之间包括的为上行时隙。需要说明的是,如果使用终端设备特定的控制信息来通知图9圈出的部分,则接入网设备还可以先获取终端设备的能力,再来确定图9圈出的部分可以通过特定信令调度给哪些终端设备。FIG. 9 shows another implementation in which the resolution indication information is not indicated, and the above description is equally applicable to FIG. Different from FIG. 8, the duration portion in which the indication information cannot be indicated is located in one or several slots starting after the end of the downlink, that is, the portion circled in FIG. 9 for the SCS of 30 kHz and the SCS of 60 kHz. The circled part may be indicated by the indication information, and the indication information may be carried in the same downlink control channel as the indication information indicating the duration, or may be separately carried; or the implicit indication method may also be used. That is, the terminal device may include an uplink time slot between the default downlink time slot and the duration indicated by the indication information. It should be noted that if the terminal device specific control information is used to notify the part circled in FIG. 9 , the access network device may also acquire the capability of the terminal device first, and then determine that the part circled in FIG. 9 can be scheduled through specific signaling. Which terminal devices are given.
另外,需要说明的是,无论使用什么样的系统参数,如果在其所对应的时隙内既包括下行DL也包括上行UL,那么该时隙内的传输时长可能也不能通过上述指示信息指示,此时,也可以使用SFI来指示该slot内的传输时长部分。这对于图8和图9的实现方式都有效。例如以SCS 60kHz为例,图10中的空白部分表示的传输时长可以通过SFI来指示,例如可以通过SFI指示的未知状态来实现。In addition, it should be noted that, regardless of the system parameters used, if both the downlink DL and the uplink UL are included in the corresponding time slot, the transmission duration in the time slot may not be indicated by the indication information. At this time, SFI can also be used to indicate the portion of the transmission duration within the slot. This is valid for both the implementations of Figures 8 and 9. For example, taking SCS 60 kHz as an example, the transmission duration indicated by the blank portion in FIG. 10 can be indicated by SFI, for example, by an unknown state indicated by SFI.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,用于指示传输时长的指示信息也可以只使用 SFI来进行指示。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the indication information for indicating the transmission duration may also be indicated by using only the SFI.
作为另一种可选的实施方式,以第一指示信息指示时隙对应的传输结构为例进行说明。可以理解的是,当第一指示信息指示至少一个时隙对应的传输结构时,终端设备可以根据该第一指示信息,确定出特定传输结构对应的时隙个数,相当于确定出接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数。As another optional implementation manner, the first indication information indicates a transmission structure corresponding to the time slot as an example for description. It can be understood that when the first indication information indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the at least one time slot, the terminal device may determine, according to the first indication information, the number of time slots corresponding to the specific transmission structure, which is equivalent to determining the access network. The number of time units that the device sends and/or receives data.
例如,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的子载波间隔为15kHz(对应第二系统参数)时,第一指示信息可以指示的最大第一时隙的个数为4,且第一指示信息指示的内容或者说第一指示信息对应的内容为For example, when the subcarrier spacing used by the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is 15 kHz (corresponding to the second system parameter), the number of the first first time slot that the first indication information can indicate is 4, and The content indicated by the first indication information or the content corresponding to the first indication information is
[具有传输结构1的第二时隙具有传输结构2的第二时隙具有传输结构3的第二时隙具有传输结构4的第二时隙][Second time slot with transmission structure 1 having a second time slot of transmission structure 2 having a second time slot of transmission structure 3 having a second time slot of transmission structure 4]
可见,在本示例中,第一指示信息指示的内容除了包括时隙个数(包括4个时隙)还包括每个时隙对应的传输结构。需要说明的是,这里的传输结构1、传输结构2、传输结构3、传输结构4仅仅为了区分不同时隙对应的传输结构,即传输结构1、传输结构2、传输结构3、传输结构4可以为互为相同的传输结构,或者互为不同的传输结构,或者部分传输结构相同,部分传输结构不同。更为一般地,这里的传输结构1、传输结构2、传输结构3、传输结构4可以为下表2所示出的传输格式中的任意一种。It can be seen that, in this example, the content indicated by the first indication information includes a transmission structure corresponding to each time slot in addition to the number of time slots (including 4 time slots). It should be noted that the transmission structure 1, the transmission structure 2, the transmission structure 3, and the transmission structure 4 are only used to distinguish the transmission structures corresponding to different time slots, that is, the transmission structure 1, the transmission structure 2, the transmission structure 3, and the transmission structure 4 They are the same transmission structure, or different transmission structures, or part of the transmission structure is the same, and some transmission structures are different. More generally, the transmission structure 1, the transmission structure 2, the transmission structure 3, and the transmission structure 4 herein may be any of the transmission formats shown in Table 2 below.
表2时隙格式示意表Table 2 slot format diagram
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000012
表2时隙格式示意表(续)Table 2 Schematic diagram of time slot format (continued)
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000013
表2中,共可以支持256种不同的时隙格式(格式0~格式255),但目前NR只支持62种有明确含义的时隙格式,格式62~格式255目前为保留状态(reserved),其中一个时隙格式通过这个时隙中包括的14个OFDM符号对应的不同传输类型表示,其中D(downlink)表示该OFDM符号用于下行数据传输,U(uplink)表示该OFDM符号用于上行数据传输,X(flexible)表示该OFDM符号为为止状态(unknown)。另一方面,采用本申请实施例提供的方法,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的子载波间隔为30kHz(对应第二系统参数)时,第一指示信息指示的内容或者说第一指示信息对应的内容可以为In Table 2, a total of 256 different slot formats (Format 0 to Format 255) can be supported. However, NR only supports 62 slot formats with explicit meanings, and Format 62 to Format 255 are currently reserved. One of the slot formats is represented by a different transmission type corresponding to 14 OFDM symbols included in the slot, where D (downlink) indicates that the OFDM symbol is used for downlink data transmission, and U (uplink) indicates that the OFDM symbol is used for uplink data. Transmission, X (flexible) indicates that the OFDM symbol is in an unknown state. On the other hand, with the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, when the subcarrier spacing used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is 30 kHz (corresponding to the second system parameter), the content indicated by the first indication information or Said that the content corresponding to the first indication information may be
[具有传输结构1的第一时隙具有传输结构2的第一时隙具有传输结构3的第一时隙具有传输结构4的第一时隙具有传输结构5的第一时隙具有传输结构6的第一时隙具有传输结构7的第一时隙具有传输结构8的第一时隙][The first time slot with transmission structure 1 has a first time slot of transmission structure 2 The first time slot with transmission structure 3 has a first time slot with transmission structure 4 The first time slot with transmission structure 5 has transmission structure 6 The first time slot has a first time slot of the transmission structure 7 having a first time slot of the transmission structure 8]
其中同上理解,这里的传输结构1~8也仅仅只是为了区分不同时隙对应的传输结构,其可以为表2中的任意一种时隙格式。基于此例,可以观察到,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用不同系统参数时,第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数具 有如下特征:SCS大的第一指示信息指示的第一时隙个数大于SCS小的第一指示信息指示的第二时隙最大个数。因为SCS大的系统参数对应的时隙持续时间小于SCS小的系统参数对应的时隙持续时间。The same as above, the transmission structures 1 to 8 herein are only for distinguishing the transmission structures corresponding to different time slots, and may be any one of the time slot formats in Table 2. Based on this example, it can be observed that when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses different system parameters, the number of time units indicated by the first indication information has the following characteristics: the first indication information indicated by the SCS is indicated by The number of the first time slots is greater than the maximum number of second time slots indicated by the first indication information that is smaller than the SCS. The slot duration corresponding to the SCS large system parameter is less than the slot duration corresponding to the system parameter with a small SCS.
因此采用本申请实施例的方法,可以在接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用不同系统参数时,第一指示信息都可以指示可比或者相同的传输时长。这尤其适用于免许可频段资源,因为接入网设备在竞争到免许可频段资源之后,在免许可频段资源上进行数据传输的数据传输时长是受限的,例如受限于MCOT,而MCOT的长度一般是地域法规约束的,与不同的系统参数无关,因此采用本申请的实施方式,可以简化不同系统参数下第一指示信息的设计,并实现有效的数据传输格式和/或数据传输对应的时间单元个数的指示。Therefore, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses different system parameters, the first indication information may indicate a comparable or the same transmission duration. This applies in particular to unlicensed band resources, since access network devices are limited in data transmission time for data transmission on unlicensed band resources after competing for unlicensed band resources, such as MCOT, and MCOT The length is generally restricted by the geographical regulations, and is independent of different system parameters. Therefore, the implementation of the present application can simplify the design of the first indication information under different system parameters, and implement an effective data transmission format and/or data transmission corresponding. An indication of the number of time units.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,终端设备可以周期性地检测接入网设备发送的第一指示信息,相应地,接入网设备可以周期性地发送第一指示信息。假设终端设备每隔m个时隙检测第一指示信息,则为了保证终端设备可以获知每个时隙对应的传输结构,第一指示信息可以指示m个时隙中的每个时隙对应的传输结构。采用本申请实施例的方法,特别地,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用SCS大的第一系统参数时,第一指示信息指示的时隙个数可以大于当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用SCS小的第二系统参数时,第一指示信息所能指示的时隙个数。对应地,采用本申请实施例的方法,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用SCS大的第一系统参数时,终端设备检测第一指示信息的周期大于当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用SCS小的第二系统参数时,终端设备检测第一指示信息的周期。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may periodically detect the first indication information sent by the access network device, and correspondingly, the access network device may periodically send the first indication information. Assuming that the terminal device detects the first indication information every m time slots, in order to ensure that the terminal device can learn the transmission structure corresponding to each time slot, the first indication information may indicate the transmission corresponding to each time slot of the m time slots. structure. The method of the embodiment of the present application, in particular, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the first system parameter of the SCS, the number of slots indicated by the first indication information may be greater than when the access network is used. When the data transmission between the device and the terminal device uses the second system parameter of the SCS, the number of time slots that the first indication information can indicate. Correspondingly, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the first system parameter of the SCS, the period of detecting the first indication information by the terminal device is greater than that of the access network device and When the data transmission between the terminal devices uses the second system parameter of the SCS, the terminal device detects the period of the first indication information.
下面针对当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用不同的系统参数时,第一指示信息指示的传输结构的几种具体形式。其中第一系统参数对应的SCS为60kHz,第二系统参数对应的SCS为15kHz。The following is a specific form of the transmission structure indicated by the first indication information when different system parameters are used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device. The SCS corresponding to the first system parameter is 60 kHz, and the SCS corresponding to the second system parameter is 15 kHz.
(1)当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的为第二系统参数时,第一指示信息例如SFI指示的内容可以如表3所示。(1) When the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the second system parameter, the content indicated by the first indication information, for example, SFI, may be as shown in Table 3.
表3 SCS=15kHz,第一指示信息指示内容示例表Table 3 SCS=15kHz, the first indication information indicates the content example table
格式 format 时隙1Time slot 1 时隙2 Time slot 2 时隙3 Time slot 3 时隙4 Time slot 4
第一种格式First format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot
第二种格式Second format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot
第三种格式Third format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot
第四种格式Fourth format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot
其中,表3中,当SCS=15kHz时,第一指示信息指示的时隙个数为4个,针对不同的格式,第一指示信息指示的接入网设备发送数据的时间单元个数和接收数据的时间单元个数分别为[4 0]、[3 1]、[2 2]、[1 3],其中[X Y]中的X表示接入网设备发送数据的时间单元个数,Y表示接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数,时隙1~时隙4,可以理解为SFI指示的第一个时隙~第四个时隙,即SFI指示的从时间上从先往后的顺序 对应的不同时隙。采用本申请实施例的方法,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的为第一系统参数时,第一指示信息指示的下行时隙个数至少大于4个,或第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数至少大于3个,或第一指示信息指示的用于下行数据传输和上行数据传输的时隙总个数大于4个。In the table 3, when the SCS is 15 kHz, the number of time slots indicated by the first indication information is four, and the number of time units and the number of time units for transmitting the data by the access network device indicated by the first indication information are different for different formats. The number of time units of data is [4 0], [3 1], [2 2], [1 3], where X in [X Y] represents the number of time units in which the access network device transmits data, Y Indicates the number of time units in which the access network device receives data, and the time slot 1 to time slot 4 can be understood as the first time slot to the fourth time slot indicated by the SFI, that is, the SFI indicates the time from the first to the last. The order corresponds to different time slots. With the method of the embodiment of the present application, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the first system parameter, the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information is at least four, or the first indication. The number of uplink time slots indicated by the information is at least greater than three, or the total number of time slots indicated by the first indication information for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission is greater than four.
在这种情况下,第一指示信息例如SFI指示的内容可以如表4所示。表4中,S1代表时隙1,S2代表时隙2,以此类推,且S1~S16为SFI指示的第1个时隙至第16个时隙,D和U分别表示该时隙用于下行数据传输还是用于上行数据传输。基于表4,针对不同的格式(表4中分别用0、1、2、3表示),当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的SCS为60kHz时,第一指示信息指示的接入网设备发送数据的时隙个数和接收数据的时隙个数分别为[16 0]、[12 4]、[8 8]、[4 12]。基于上述描述,可以观察到,当SCS=15kHz,第一指示信息指示的下行时隙的个数可以为{4,3,2,1},指示的上行时隙的个数可以为{0,1,2,3},指示的时隙个数可以为4,这些分别可以对应第二集合。另一方面,当SCS=60kHz时,第一指示信息指示的下行时隙的个数可以为{16,12,8,4},指示的上行时隙的个数可以为{0,4,8,12},指示的时隙个数为16,这些分别可以对应第一集合。In this case, the content indicated by the first indication information such as SFI may be as shown in Table 4. In Table 4, S1 represents time slot 1, S2 represents time slot 2, and so on, and S1 to S16 are the first time slot to the 16th time slot indicated by SFI, and D and U respectively indicate that the time slot is used for Downlink data transmission is also used for uplink data transmission. Based on Table 4, for different formats (represented by 0, 1, 2, and 3 in Table 4, respectively), when the SCS used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is 60 kHz, the first indication information indicates The number of slots in which the access network device transmits data and the number of slots in which data is received are [16 0], [12 4], [8 8], [4 12], respectively. Based on the above description, it can be observed that when SCS=15 kHz, the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be {4, 3, 2, 1}, and the number of indicated uplink time slots may be {0, 1, 2, 3}, the number of indicated time slots may be 4, and these may correspond to the second set respectively. On the other hand, when SCS=60 kHz, the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be {16, 12, 8, 4}, and the number of indicated uplink time slots may be {0, 4, 8 , 12}, the number of indicated slots is 16, which may correspond to the first set respectively.
在该例中,第一集合中包括的任意一个元素在第二集合中都可以找到与其成比例的元素,并且两个元素之间的比例关系与第一系统参数和第二系统参数之间的比例关系有关,以第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数为例,SCS=60kHz指示的上行时隙个数与SCS=15kHz指示的上行时隙个数之间的比值可以为:12/3,8/2,4/1等。同理以第一指示信息指示的下行时隙个数为例,也有类似说明。即一般的,在本例中,当SCS=15kHz时,[X Y]中的X、或者Y、或者X和Y,都可以看为第二集合中包括的元素;当SCS=60kHz时,[X Y]中的X、或者Y、或者X和Y,都可以看为第一集合中包括的元素。In this example, any one of the elements included in the first set can find an element proportional to it in the second set, and the proportional relationship between the two elements is between the first system parameter and the second system parameter. The proportional relationship is related to the number of uplink time slots indicated by the first indication information. The ratio between the number of uplink time slots indicated by SCS=60 kHz and the number of uplink time slots indicated by SCS=15 kHz may be: 12/3. , 8/2, 4/1, etc. Similarly, the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information is taken as an example, and similar descriptions are also made. That is, in general, in this example, when SCS=15 kHz, X, or Y, or X and Y in [X Y] can be regarded as elements included in the second set; when SCS=60 kHz, [ X, or Y, or X and Y in X Y] can be regarded as elements included in the first set.
表4 SCS=60kHz,第一指示信息指示内容示例表Table 4 SCS=60kHz, the first indication information indicates the content example table
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000014
(2)当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的为第二系统参数时,第一指示信息例如SFI指示的内容可以如表5所示。(2) When the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the second system parameter, the content indicated by the first indication information, for example, SFI, may be as shown in Table 5.
表5 SCS=15kHz,第一指示信息指示内容示例表Table 5 SCS=15kHz, the first indication information indicates the content example table
格式 format 时隙1Time slot 1 时隙2 Time slot 2 时隙3 Time slot 3 时隙4 Time slot 4
第一种格式First format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot
第二种格式Second format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 下行时隙Downlink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot 不指示Not indicating
第三种格式Third format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot 不指示Not indicating
第四种格式Fourth format 下行时隙Downlink time slot 上行时隙Uplink time slot 不指示Not indicating 不指示Not indicating
其中表5与表3指示的主要区别在于,第一指示信息指示的时隙个数可以不同,例如,第二种格式和第三种格式,第一指示信息均指示3个时隙对应的传输结构;第四种格式,第一指示信息只指示2个时隙对应的传输结构。针对不同的格式,第一指示信息指示的接入网设备发送数据的时间单元个数和接收数据的时间单元个数分别为[3 1]、[2 1]、[1 2]、[1 1],其中[X Y]中的X和Y表达的含义同前。The main difference between the table 5 and the table 3 is that the number of time slots indicated by the first indication information may be different. For example, the second format and the third format, the first indication information indicates the transmission corresponding to the three time slots. Structure; in the fourth format, the first indication information indicates only the transmission structure corresponding to the two time slots. For different formats, the number of time units for transmitting data and the number of time units for receiving data indicated by the first indication information are [3 1], [2 1], [1 2], [1 1 ], wherein the X and Y expressions in [X Y] have the same meaning as before.
采用本申请实施例的方法,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的为第一系统参数时,第一指示信息指示的下行时隙个数至少大于4个,或第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数至少大于2个,或第一指示信息指示的用于下行数据传输和上行数据传输的时隙总个数大于4个。例如,在这种情况下,第一指示信息例如SFI指示的内容可以如表6所示,表6中的符号含义同表4,在这里不做具体描述。With the method of the embodiment of the present application, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses the first system parameter, the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information is at least four, or the first indication. The number of uplink time slots indicated by the information is at least greater than two, or the total number of time slots indicated by the first indication information for downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission is greater than four. For example, in this case, the content indicated by the first indication information, for example, the SFI, may be as shown in Table 6. The meanings of the symbols in Table 6 are the same as those in Table 4, and are not specifically described herein.
基于表6,针对不同的格式,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的SCS为60kHz时,第一指示信息指示的接入网设备发送数据的时隙个数和接收数据的时隙个数分别为[12 4]、[8 6]、[4 8]、[4 9]。基于上述描述,可以观察到,当SCS=15kHz,第一指示信息指示的下行时隙的个数可以为{3,2,1},指示的上行时隙的个数可以为{1,2},指示的时隙个数可以为{4,3,2},这些分别可以对应第二集合。另一方面,当SCS=60kHz时,第一指示信息指示的下行时隙的个数可以为{12,8,4},指示的上行时隙的个数可以为{4,6,8,9},指示的时隙个数为{16,14,12,13},这些分别可以对应第一集合。在该例中,第一集合中包括的部分元素在第二集合中可以找到与其成比例的元素,并且两个元素之间的比例关系与第一系统参数和第二系统参数之间的比例关系有关,以第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数为例,SCS=60kHz对应的上行时隙个数与Based on Table 6, for different formats, when the SCS used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is 60 kHz, the number of time slots in which the access network device indicated by the first indication information transmits data and the received data The number of slots is [12 4], [8 6], [4 8], [4 9], respectively. Based on the above description, it can be observed that when SCS=15 kHz, the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be {3, 2, 1}, and the number of indicated uplink time slots may be {1, 2}. The number of indicated time slots may be {4, 3, 2}, and these may correspond to the second set respectively. On the other hand, when SCS=60 kHz, the number of downlink time slots indicated by the first indication information may be {12, 8, 4}, and the number of indicated uplink time slots may be {4, 6, 8, 9 }, the number of indicated time slots is {16, 14, 12, 13}, which respectively correspond to the first set. In this example, some of the elements included in the first set can find elements proportional to them in the second set, and the proportional relationship between the two elements is proportional to the first system parameter and the second system parameter. For example, the number of uplink time slots indicated by the first indication information is taken as an example, and the number of uplink time slots corresponding to SCS=60 kHz is related to
SCS=15kHz对应的上行时隙个数之间的比值可以为:16/4,12/3,以第一指示信息指示的下行时隙个数为例,SCS=60kHz对应的下行时隙个数与SCS=15kHz对应的下行时隙个数之间的比值可以为:12/3,8/2,4/1。The ratio of the number of uplink slots corresponding to SCS=15 kHz may be: 16/4, 12/3, taking the number of downlink slots indicated by the first indication information as an example, and the number of downlink slots corresponding to SCS=60 kHz. The ratio between the number of downlink slots corresponding to SCS=15 kHz may be: 12/3, 8/2, 4/1.
表6 SCS=60kHz,第一指示信息指示内容示例表Table 6 SCS=60kHz, the first indication information indicates the content example table
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-000016
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,第一指示信息对应的传输结构可以是RRC配置的,然后通过第一指示信息动态指示,接入网设备发送数据和/或接收数据的时间单元(时隙)个数,例如表3中时隙1~时隙4对应的结构类型可以通过RRC配置,然后第一指示信息使用2bit来表示不同的传输结构。例如当这2bit取值为00时,终端设备通过检测到的第一指示信息,可以确定时隙1~时隙4对应的传输结构为:It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the transmission structure corresponding to the first indication information may be configured by the RRC, and then dynamically indicated by the first indication information, and the time unit for the access network device to send data and/or receive data ( The number of slots, for example, the structure types corresponding to slot 1 to slot 4 in Table 3 can be configured through RRC, and then the first indication information uses 2 bits to indicate different transmission structures. For example, when the value of the 2 bit is 00, the terminal device can determine that the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot 1 to the time slot 4 is:
[下行时隙 下行时隙 下行时隙 下行时隙][downlink time slot downlink time slot downlink time slot downlink time slot]
当2bit取值为11时,终端设备通过检测到的第一指示信息,可以确定时隙1~时隙4对应的传输结构为:When the value of the 2 bit is 11, the terminal device determines that the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot 1 to the time slot 4 is:
[下行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙][downlink time slot uplink time slot uplink time slot uplink time slot]
对于表4~表6也有类似说明,在此不作赘述。Tables 4 to 6 also have similar descriptions, and are not described herein.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不指示表示的含义是,控制信息(第一指示信息)没有指示对应的时隙的传输结构。例如表6中,针对格式1,第一指示信息只指示了S1-S14的传输结构,没有指示S15和S16的传输结构。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the meaning of the indication is that the control information (first indication information) does not indicate the transmission structure of the corresponding time slot. For example, in Table 6, for format 1, the first indication information indicates only the transmission structure of S1-S14, and the transmission structure indicating S15 and S16 is not indicated.
作为一种可选的实施方式,无论接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用什么样的系统参数,都可以标准预定义或者接入网设备预配置一套系统参数对应的传输结构,然后接入网设备发送的第一指示信息可以直接指示这一套系统参数对应的传输结构。例如接入网设备预配置(例如通过RRC信令)SCS=15kHz(对应第二系统参数)对应的传输结构,例如如表3所示,第一指示信息至少包括2bit,可以指示表3中包括的传输结构,当终端设备确定接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用的系统参数不同于SCS=15kHz时,例如SCS=60kHz(对应第一系统参数),可以根据第一指示信息、第一系统参数以及第二系统参数,确定第二系统参数对应的发送和/或接收数据的时间单元(时隙)个数。仍以表3为例,假设第一指示信息包括2bit信息,且指示的传输结构为第三种格式,则终端设备根据第一指示信息,确定指示的传输结构对应的为15kHz对应的第三种格式,然后再根据第一系统参数和第二系统参数,可以按比例确定60kHz对应的传输格式,即为表4中的8个下行时隙和8个上行时隙对应的传输结构。As an optional implementation manner, no matter what system parameters are used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the transmission structure corresponding to a set of system parameters may be pre-configured by the standard pre-defined or the access network device. Then, the first indication information sent by the access network device directly indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the set of system parameters. For example, the access network device is pre-configured (for example, by RRC signaling) with a transmission structure corresponding to SCS=15 kHz (corresponding to the second system parameter). For example, as shown in Table 3, the first indication information includes at least 2 bits, which may be included in the indication table 3. Transmission structure, when the terminal device determines that the system parameter used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is different from SCS=15 kHz, for example, SCS=60 kHz (corresponding to the first system parameter), according to the first indication information, The first system parameter and the second system parameter determine a number of time units (time slots) corresponding to the second system parameter for transmitting and/or receiving data. Still taking Table 3 as an example, if the first indication information includes 2 bits of information, and the indicated transmission structure is the third format, the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, that the indicated transmission structure corresponds to the third type corresponding to 15 kHz. The format, and then according to the first system parameter and the second system parameter, the transmission format corresponding to 60 kHz can be determined proportionally, that is, the transmission structure corresponding to the eight downlink time slots and the eight uplink time slots in Table 4.
作为另外一种可选的实施方式,无论接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用什么样的系统参数,都可以标准预定义或者接入网设备预配置一套系统参数对应的传输结构,然后接入网设备发送的第一指示信息可以直接指示这一套系统参数对应的传输结构。终端设备可以根据第一指示信息和这一套参数对应的传输结构,确定当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输时使用其他系统参数时,接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元对应的传输时长。仍以表3为例,假设第一指示信息指示的传输结构为第二种格式,则终端设备根据接收到的第一指示信息,确定出第一指示信息指示的传输结构为3个下行时隙和1个上行时隙,则终端设备可以根据SCS=15kHz对应的slot duration,确定接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输长度可以为4ms,用于下行 数据传输的时间单元个数对应的传输时长为3ms,用于上行数据传输的时间单元个数对应的传输时长为1ms。As another optional implementation manner, no matter what system parameters are used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the transmission structure corresponding to a set of system parameters may be pre-defined by the standard pre-defined or the access network device. Then, the first indication information sent by the access network device directly indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the set of system parameters. The terminal device may determine, according to the first indication information and the transmission structure corresponding to the set of parameters, that the access network device sends and/or receives data when other system parameters are used when data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is used. The transmission time corresponding to the time unit. If the transmission structure indicated by the first indication information is the second format, the terminal device determines, according to the received first indication information, that the transmission structure indicated by the first indication information is three downlink time slots. And an uplink time slot, the terminal device may determine, according to the slot duration corresponding to the SCS=15 kHz, that the data transmission length between the access network device and the terminal device may be 4 ms, and the number of time units used for downlink data transmission corresponds to The transmission duration is 3 ms, and the transmission time corresponding to the number of time units for uplink data transmission is 1 ms.
在本申请实施例中,第一指示信息用于指示接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中针对免许可频段资源,如前所述,接入网设备在竞争到免许可频段资源时,不需要重新通过LBT确定免许可频段资可用性的时间是有限的,例如受MCOT限制。因此,在免许可频段资源上,为了保证第一指示信息指示的有效性,第一指示信息可以指示一个MCOT内包括的时隙对应的传输结构,或者说,可以指示一个MCOT内包括的接入网设备发送数据和/或接收数据的时间单元的个数。当然,第一指示信息所指示的时间长度也可以大于一个MCOT,例如,接入网设备可以预先判断在一次竞争到资源之后(一个MCOT之外),接入网设备预先配置的下行时间单元(用于下行数据传输的时间单元)和/或上行时间单元(用于上行数据传输的时间单元)。In the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units for the access network device to send and/or receive data within a preset time range, where the access is for the unlicensed band resource, as described above. When the network equipment competes to the unlicensed band resources, the time required to re-determine the license-free band availability through the LBT is limited, for example, subject to MCOT restrictions. Therefore, on the unlicensed band resource, in order to ensure the validity of the indication indicated by the first indication information, the first indication information may indicate a transmission structure corresponding to a time slot included in an MCOT, or may indicate an access included in an MCOT. The number of time units in which the network device sends data and/or receives data. Certainly, the length of time indicated by the first indication information may also be greater than one MCOT. For example, the access network device may pre-determine a downlink time unit pre-configured by the access network device after a competition for resources (except for one MCOT). Time unit for downlink data transmission) and/or uplink time unit (time unit for uplink data transmission).
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,第一指示信息用于指示接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,可以理解为,第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数所对应的传输时长在预设时间范围对应的传输时长之内,或者,第一指示信息所指示的这些时间单元是在预设时间范围内的。预设时间范围的起始位置可以是不确定的。例如在免许可频段资源上,以接入网设备为例,接入网设备需要根据CCA的结果,确定MCOT或者说一次传输机会(transmission opportunity,TxOP,也可以称为传输时机)的起始位置,而MCOT或者TxOP对应的传输时长是与法规约束有关的,可以认为是预设置的。因此,当第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,可以理解为,这些被指示的时间单元是在预设时间范围内的,或者被指示的时间单元对应的传输时长在预设的时间范围内对应的传输时长之内。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data in a preset time range, which may be understood as the first indication information indication. The transmission time length corresponding to the number of time units is within the transmission duration corresponding to the preset time range, or the time units indicated by the first indication information are within a preset time range. The starting position of the preset time range can be indeterminate. For example, in the unlicensed band resource, taking the access network device as an example, the access network device needs to determine the starting position of the MCOT or a transmission opportunity (TxOP, which may also be referred to as a transmission opportunity) according to the result of the CCA. The transmission duration corresponding to MCOT or TxOP is related to regulatory constraints and can be considered as pre-set. Therefore, when the first indication information indicates the number of time units for the access network device to send and/or receive data within a preset time range, it can be understood that the indicated time units are within a preset time range. Or the transmission duration corresponding to the indicated time unit is within the corresponding transmission duration within a preset time range.
可选的,第一指示信息还用于指示时间单元个数的起始位置;或者,终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示时间单元个数的起始位置。无论接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输采用的系统参数中包括何种SCS,指示信息都使用1ms作为粒度单位指示传输时长,而时间单元的起始位置可以通过与当前使用的系统参数对应的时隙长度为单位进行通知。下面以第一指示信息为例,举例说明当第一指示信息指示时间单元个数的起始位置时,可选的几种实现方式。需要说明的是,下述描述也适用于第二指示信息。Optionally, the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units; or the terminal device receives the second indication information sent by the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number of time units. The starting position. Regardless of the SCS included in the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the indication information uses 1 ms as the granularity unit to indicate the transmission duration, and the start position of the time unit can pass the system parameters currently used. The corresponding time slot length is notified in units. The following uses the first indication information as an example to illustrate several implementation manners when the first indication information indicates the starting position of the number of time units. It should be noted that the following description also applies to the second indication information.
需要说明的是,优选地,当第一指示信息或者第二指示信息指示的为时间单元个数的起始位置时,被指示的这些时间单元个数对应的时间单元可以为在时间上连续的且用于发送数据或者用于接收数据的多个时间单元。It should be noted that, when the first indication information or the second indication information indicates the starting position of the number of time units, the time units corresponding to the indicated number of time units may be consecutive in time. And a plurality of time units for transmitting data or for receiving data.
其中,该时间单元个数的起始位置可以理解为接入网设备传输数据的时间单元个数是从什么时间位置开始度量的。该时间单元个数的起始位置可以与第一时间偏移量相关联,例如,该时间单元个数的起始位置可以为一个时间单元向后偏移第一时间偏移量后对应的时间单元的起始边界。可选地,该第一时间偏移量可以通过第一指示信息指示。其中第一时间偏移量可以包括如下实现方式:The starting position of the number of time units can be understood as the time unit from which the access network device transmits data is measured. The starting position of the number of time units may be associated with the first time offset. For example, the starting position of the number of time units may be a time after the time unit is shifted backward by the first time offset. The starting boundary of the unit. Optionally, the first time offset may be indicated by the first indication information. The first time offset may include the following implementation manners:
(1)该时间单元个数的起始位置可以为第一指示信息所在的时间单元向后偏移第一时间偏移量后对应的时间单元的起始位置。即,该第一时间偏移量为第一指示信息所在的时间单元与第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数中对应的第一个时间单元之间的时间偏移量。(1) The starting position of the number of time units may be the starting position of the corresponding time unit after the time unit in which the first indication information is located is shifted backward by the first time offset. That is, the first time offset is a time offset between a time unit in which the first indication information is located and a first time unit corresponding to the number of time units indicated by the first indication information.
例如如图12a和图12b所示,图12a和图12b以第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数为例说明。图12a中,第一时间偏移量对应的具体数值为1(代表1个时间单元或1个时隙),图12b,第一时间偏移量对应的具体数值为2(代表2个时间单元或2个时隙)。For example, as shown in FIG. 12a and FIG. 12b, FIG. 12a and FIG. 12b illustrate the number of time units for receiving data by the access network device indicated by the first indication information. In FIG. 12a, the specific value corresponding to the first time offset is 1 (representing 1 time unit or 1 time slot), and FIG. 12b, the specific value corresponding to the first time offset is 2 (representing 2 time units) Or 2 time slots).
(2)更为一般地,该第一时间偏移量为特定时间单元与第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数中对应的第一个时间单元之间的时间偏移量。这里的特定时间单元例如可以与第一指示信息所在的时间单元具有某种预设关系,例如为第一指示信息所在的时间单元的下一个时间单元,例如如图13所示,图13中仍以第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数为例说明。(2) More generally, the first time offset is a time offset between a specific time unit and a first time unit corresponding to the number of time units indicated by the first indication information. The specific time unit here may have a certain preset relationship with the time unit in which the first indication information is located, for example, the next time unit of the time unit in which the first indication information is located, for example, as shown in FIG. 13 , still in FIG. 13 The number of time units for receiving data by the access network device indicated by the first indication information is taken as an example.
又例如,如果第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数,则该时间单元个数的起始位置可以为接入网设备发送数据的下行时间单元的结束位置为基础来度量,如图14所示。图14中,第一时间偏移量对应的具体数值为1(代表1个时间单元或1个时隙)。For another example, if the first indication information indicates the number of time units of the access network device receiving data, the starting position of the number of time units may be based on the ending position of the downlink time unit for sending data of the access network device. To measure, as shown in Figure 14. In Fig. 14, the specific value corresponding to the first time offset is 1 (representing 1 time unit or 1 time slot).
在本申请实施例提供的方法中,终端设备根据接入网设备发送的控制信息(为了便于描述,记为控制信息A),确定出的第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数的起始位置(为了便于描述,记为起始位置#1),与该控制信息所在的时间单元(为了便于描述,将该时间单元的起始位置记为起始位置#2)之间的关系可以具有如下表示形式。其中需要说明的是,这里的起始位置可以用第一指示信息所指示的时间单元个数中的第一个时间单元的起始边界来表示,也可以有其他表示形式,不作具体限定;这里的控制信息可以是第一指示信息,也可以是不同于第一指示信息的其他指示信息,例如第二指示信息,也可以有其他表示形式,不作具体限定。当指示时间单元个数起始位置的指示信息不同于第一指示信息时(例如为第二指示信息),第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以承载在相同的下行控制信道,也可以承载在不同的下行控制信道中。以下就起始位置#1与起始位置#2的可能存在的关系进行具体说明。In the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device determines the starting position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information according to the control information sent by the access network device (referred to as control information A for convenience of description). (For convenience of description, denoted as the start position #1), the relationship between the time unit in which the control information is located (for the convenience of description, the start position of the time unit is referred to as the start position #2) may have the following relationship Representation. It should be noted that the starting position herein may be represented by the starting boundary of the first time unit in the number of time units indicated by the first indication information, and may also have other representations, which are not specifically limited; The control information may be the first indication information, or may be other indication information different from the first indication information, for example, the second indication information, and may also have other representations, which are not specifically limited. When the indication information indicating the start position of the number of time units is different from the first indication information (for example, the second indication information), the first indication information and the second indication information may be carried on the same downlink control channel, and may also be carried in Different downlink control channels. The following is a detailed description of the possible relationship between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2.
(1)起始位置#1与起始位置#2为相同的起始位置。(1) The starting position #1 and the starting position #2 are the same starting position.
例如,当第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备发送数据的时间单元个数时,该时间单元个数的起始位置可以与包括控制信息A的时间单元的起始位置相同。又例如,当第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备发送数据和接收数据的时间单元个数时,该时间单元个数的起始位置可以与包括控制信息A的时间单元的起始位置相同。如图15所示。For example, when the first indication information indicates the number of time units for transmitting data to the access network device, the starting position of the number of time units may be the same as the starting position of the time unit including the control information A. For another example, when the first indication information indicates the number of time units for transmitting data and receiving data for the access network device, the starting position of the number of time units may be the same as the starting position of the time unit including the control information A. . As shown in Figure 15.
(2)起始位置#1与起始位置#2之间有一定的时间偏移,且起始位置#1在起始位置#2之后,该时间偏移可以通过时间单元的个数来表示。(2) There is a certain time offset between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2, and after the starting position #1 is after the starting position #2, the time offset can be expressed by the number of time units. .
例如,当第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备发送数据和接收数据的时间单元个数、发送数据的时间单元个数、或者接收数据的时间单元个数时,起始位置#1与起始位置#2之间都可以满足该关系。如图16所示。For example, when the first indication information indicates the number of time units for transmitting data and receiving data, the number of time units for transmitting data, or the number of time units for receiving data, the starting position #1 starts from This relationship can be satisfied between the starting position #2. As shown in Figure 16.
(3)起始位置#1与起始位置#2之间有一定的时间偏移,且起始位置#1在起始位置#2之前,该时间偏移也可以通过时间单元的个数来表示。(3) There is a certain time offset between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2, and the starting position #1 is before the starting position #2, and the time offset can also be determined by the number of time units. Said.
在本申请实施例中,如果起始位置#1与起始位置#2为相同的起始位置,则终端设备一旦检测到控制信息A(例如第一指示信息或第二指示信息),则就可以确定出第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数的起始位置,即包括控制信息A的时间单元的起始边界可以理解为第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数的起始位置;如果起始位置#1与起始位置#2之间有一定的时间偏移,则控制信息A可以包括该时间偏移的相关信息,例如控制信息A可以指示该时间偏移,基于此,终端设备一旦检测到控制信息A(例如第一指示信息或第二指示信息),就可以包括控制信息A的时间单元位置以及控制信息A所指示的时间偏移,确定出第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数的起始位置。In the embodiment of the present application, if the starting position #1 and the starting position #2 are the same starting position, the terminal device detects the control information A (for example, the first indication information or the second indication information), then The starting position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information may be determined, that is, the starting boundary of the time unit including the control information A may be understood as the starting position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information; There is a certain time offset between the start position #1 and the start position #2, and the control information A may include related information of the time offset. For example, the control information A may indicate the time offset, based on which the terminal device once When the control information A (for example, the first indication information or the second indication information) is detected, the time unit position of the control information A and the time offset indicated by the control information A may be included, and the time unit indicated by the first indication information is determined. The starting position of the number.
例如,当第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备发送数据的时间单元个数、或者当第一指示信息指示的为接入网设备发送数据和接收数据的时间单元个数时,起始位置#1与起始位置#2之间都可以满足该关系。如图17所示。For example, when the first indication information indicates the number of time units for transmitting data for the access network device, or when the first indication information indicates the number of time units for transmitting data and receiving data for the access network device, the starting position This relationship can be satisfied between #1 and the starting position #2. As shown in Figure 17.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,起始位置#1和起始位置#2之间如果存在时间偏移,则该时间偏移可以通过时间单元个数表示,或者也可以通过时间单元个数对应的传输时长表示,或者采用其他形式,不作具体限定。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, if there is a time offset between the starting position #1 and the starting position #2, the time offset may be represented by the number of time units, or may also be through the time unit. The transmission duration corresponding to the number is expressed, or other forms are used, and no specific limitation is imposed.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,如果接入网设备发送的第一指示信息,指示的是接入网设备发送数据和接收数据的时间单元个数总和,则终端设备接收到该第一指示信息时,除了可以确定接入网设备发送数据和接收数据的时间单元个数总和之外,还可以根据第一指示信息确定接入网设备发送数据的时间单元个数,或者,根据第一指示信息确定接入网设备接收数据的时间单元个数。例如,如前所述,当第一指示信息指示的为时隙对应的传输结构时,终端设备就可以根据第一指示信息确定上述内容。特别地,终端设备可以根据第一指示信息指示的下行时间单元个数,确定上行时间单元个数的起始位置。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, if the first indication information sent by the access network device indicates the sum of the number of time units of the access network device sending data and receiving data, the terminal device receives the first When an indication information is used, in addition to determining the sum of the number of time units for transmitting data and receiving data by the access network device, the number of time units for transmitting data by the access network device may be determined according to the first indication information, or An indication information determines the number of time units in which the access network device receives data. For example, as described above, when the first indication information indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot, the terminal device may determine the content according to the first indication information. In particular, the terminal device may determine the starting position of the number of uplink time units according to the number of downlink time units indicated by the first indication information.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备接收到接入网设备发送的用于指示时间单元个数起始位置的控制信息A之后,在确定起始位置时,可以通过如下方式:In the embodiment of the present application, after receiving the control information A sent by the access network device for indicating the starting position of the number of time units, the terminal device may determine the starting position by:
(1)如果终端设备确定和接入网设备之间的数据传输使用的为第一系统参数时,终端设备可以根据控制信息A和第一系统参数,确定起始位置。(1) If the terminal device determines that the data transmission between the access network device and the access network device uses the first system parameter, the terminal device may determine the starting position according to the control information A and the first system parameter.
(2)如果终端设备确定和接入网设备之间的数据传输使用的为第二系统参数时,终端设备可以根据控制信息A和第二系统参数,确定起始位置。(2) If the terminal device determines that the data transmission between the access network device and the access network device uses the second system parameter, the terminal device may determine the starting position according to the control information A and the second system parameter.
(3)无论终端设备和接入网设备之间的数据传输使用的是什么类型的系统参数,终端设备都可以根据控制信息A和参考系统参数(例如本申请实施例中的第二系统参数),确定起始位置。(3) Regardless of the type of system parameter used for data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device, the terminal device may be based on the control information A and the reference system parameter (for example, the second system parameter in the embodiment of the present application) , determine the starting position.
针对方式(1)和(2)的具体指示方式,例如可以如图8所示,其中图8中的offset可以理解为控制信息A指示的内容。图8中,当SCS=15kHz时,控制信息A(在本例中为第一指示信息)指示的offset对应的时隙个数为1,对应的传输时长为1ms,第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数为3,则终端设备可以确定在检测到的第一指示信息之后的1个时隙(或者1ms)之后开始,为第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数的起始位置;类似地,当SCS=30kHz时,控制信息A(在本例中为第一指示信息)指示的 offset对应的时隙个数为1,对应的传输时长为0.5ms,第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数为6,则终端设备可以确定在检测到的第一指示信息之后的1个时隙(或者0.5ms)之后开始,为第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数的起始位置;当SCS=60kHz时,控制信息A(在本例中为第一指示信息)指示的offset对应的时隙个数为1,对应的传输时长为0.25ms,第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数为12,则终端设备可以确定在检测到的第一指示信息之后的1个时隙(或者1ms)之后开始,为第一指示信息指示的上行时隙个数的起始位置。这样做的好处在于:发送数据和/或接收数据的时间单元的起始位置与实际数据传输对应的系统参数相关,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输采用的子载波间隔较大时,相对于当接入网设备和终端设备之间的传输传输采用的较小子载波间隔,因为前者对应的时隙传输时长更短,因此对于同样的控制信息A,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输采用的子载波间隔较大时,终端设备可以识别更为灵活的时间单元的起始位置。For the specific indication manners of the modes (1) and (2), for example, as shown in FIG. 8, the offset in FIG. 8 can be understood as the content indicated by the control information A. In FIG. 8, when SCS=15 kHz, the number of slots corresponding to the offset indicated by the control information A (in this example, the first indication information) is 1, and the corresponding transmission duration is 1 ms, and the uplink indicated by the first indication information is If the number of slots is 3, the terminal device may determine, after 1 slot (or 1 ms) after the detected first indication information, a starting position of the number of uplink slots indicated by the first indication information; Similarly, when SCS=30 kHz, the number of slots corresponding to the offset indicated by the control information A (in this example, the first indication information) is 1, and the corresponding transmission duration is 0.5 ms, and the uplink indicated by the first indication information is If the number of time slots is 6, the terminal device may determine, starting after one time slot (or 0.5 ms) after the detected first indication information, the starting position of the number of uplink time slots indicated by the first indication information. When SCS=60 kHz, the number of slots corresponding to the offset indicated by the control information A (in this example, the first indication information) is 1, and the corresponding transmission duration is 0.25 ms, and the uplink time slot indicated by the first indication information The number is 12, the terminal device can determine the first detected The start position after the one time slot (or 1 ms) following the indication information is the start position of the number of uplink time slots indicated by the first indication information. The advantage of this is that the starting position of the time unit for transmitting data and/or receiving data is related to the system parameter corresponding to the actual data transmission, and the subcarrier spacing used by the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device is relatively large. When compared to the smaller subcarrier spacing used for transmission transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, since the transmission time length of the corresponding time slot is shorter, for the same control information A, when accessing the network device and When the subcarrier spacing used for data transmission between the terminal devices is large, the terminal device can identify the starting position of the more flexible time unit.
针对方式(3)的具体指示方式,如图9所示,无论终端设备和接入网设备之间的数据传输采用何种类型的系统参数,终端设备都根据SCS=15kHz对应的时隙传输时长来理解时间单元的起始位置。例如当SCS=15kHz、SCS=30kHZ、SCS=60kHz时,控制信息A中与起始位置相关联的指示信息(例如offset)对应的传输时长均为1ms。可选地,在上述SCS对应不同值的情况下,控制信息A中与起始位置相邻的offset可以都对应相同的值,例如均为1,终端设备可以根据SCS=15kHz对应的时隙传输时长来解读1对应的具体数值,即1*1ms=1ms。这样做的好处在于:当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输采用较大的子载波间隔时,因为与起始位置相关联的指示信息,都是按照较小的子载波间隔对应的时隙传输时长来理解,因此,当接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输采用较大的子载波间隔时,在相同的控制信息A比特开销情况下,可以指示的时间偏移更大。这里的时间偏移,是指第一指示信息指示的时间单元个数的起始位置与控制信息A的起始位置之间的时间偏移。For the specific indication manner of the mode (3), as shown in FIG. 9, regardless of the type of system parameters used for data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device, the terminal device transmits the time slot according to the time slot corresponding to SCS=15 kHz. To understand the starting position of the time unit. For example, when SCS=15 kHz, SCS=30 kHZ, and SCS=60 kHz, the transmission duration corresponding to the indication information (for example, offset) associated with the start position in the control information A is 1 ms. Optionally, in the case that the foregoing SCS corresponds to different values, the offsets in the control information A that are adjacent to the start position may all correspond to the same value, for example, all are 1, and the terminal device may transmit according to the time slot corresponding to SCS=15 kHz. The length of time to interpret the corresponding specific value of 1 is 1*1ms=1ms. The advantage of this is that when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses a larger subcarrier spacing, the indication information associated with the starting location is corresponding to the smaller subcarrier spacing. The time slot transmission time length is understood. Therefore, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses a larger subcarrier spacing, the time offset that can be indicated is greater under the same control information A bit overhead. . The time offset here refers to the time offset between the start position of the number of time units indicated by the first indication information and the start position of the control information A.
作为一种特殊的实现方式,终端设备可以根据第一指示信息确定接入网设备接收数据的数据传输时长以及该数据传输时长的起始位置。在这种情况下,无论接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用什么样的系统参数,终端设备都可以根据特定系统参数下对应的时隙传输时长确定数据传输时长的起始位置。例如特定的系统参数为SCS=15kHz,对应的时隙传输时长为1ms,与数据传输时长的起始位置相关联的控制信息A的具体表示形式假设为U,则终端设备可以总根据U*1ms确定数据传输时长的起始位置。As a special implementation manner, the terminal device may determine, according to the first indication information, a data transmission duration of the data received by the access network device and a start position of the data transmission duration. In this case, regardless of the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the terminal device can determine the starting position of the data transmission duration according to the corresponding time slot transmission duration under the specific system parameter. For example, the specific system parameter is SCS=15 kHz, the corresponding time slot transmission duration is 1 ms, and the specific representation of the control information A associated with the start position of the data transmission duration is assumed to be U, and the terminal device can always be based on U*1 ms. Determine the starting position of the data transmission duration.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,与时间单元个数的起始位置相关联的时间偏移(例如上述的第一时间偏移量、时间偏移量、offset等),可以通过控制信息(第一指示信息或第二指示信息)显示指示,也可以是隐式指示的,在此不作具体限定。当采用显示指示的方式,是指控制信息(第一指示信息或第二指示信息)中包括显示的bit指示该偏移量;当采用隐式指示的方式时,一种方式下,当第一指示信息(或控制信息)指示的为时隙对应的传输结构时,例如第一指示信息指示的内容为:It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the time offset associated with the start position of the number of time units (eg, the first time offset, time offset, offset, etc. described above) may be controlled. The information (the first indication information or the second indication information) is displayed as an indication, and may be implicitly indicated, and is not specifically limited herein. When the manner of displaying the indication is adopted, it means that the bit included in the control information (the first indication information or the second indication information) indicates the offset; when the implicit indication mode is adopted, in one mode, when the first When the indication information (or control information) indicates the transmission structure corresponding to the time slot, for example, the content indicated by the first indication information is:
[下行时隙 下行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙 上行时隙][downlink time slot downlink time slot uplink time slot uplink time slot uplink time slot uplink time slot]
则终端设备可以确定如果以第一指示信息指示的第一个下行时隙作为参考点,则 可以确定接入网设备用于接收数据的上行时隙个数的起始位置与该参考点之间的偏移量为2个时隙。隐式指示还可以有其他指示形式,不作具体限定。The terminal device may determine that if the first downlink time slot indicated by the first indication information is used as a reference point, the start position of the number of uplink time slots used by the access network device to receive data and the reference point may be determined. The offset is 2 slots. The implicit indication may also have other indication forms, and is not specifically limited.
可选的,第一指示信息和第二指示信息承载在相同的下行控制信道中。Optionally, the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
在本申请实施例提供的方法中,用于指示接入网设备发送数据和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的第一指示信息可以为物理层公共控制信息,承载在下行公共控制信道中。例如通过小区公共(cell common)的RNTI加扰实现,因为物理层公共控制信息针对多个终端设备有效,因此采用公共控制信息的方式实现第一指示信息,可以节省控制信令开销。In the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send data and/or receive data may be physical layer common control information, and is carried in the downlink common control channel. For example, the cell common RNTI scrambling is implemented. Because the physical layer common control information is valid for multiple terminal devices, the first indication information is implemented by using common control information, which can save control signaling overhead.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,终端设备和接入网设备之间数据传输所使用的系统参数可能会由于数据传输类型不同而有所不同。例如终端设备和接入网设备之间的控制数据传输对应的系统参数与终端设备和接入网设备之间的业务数据传输对应的系统参数不同。但对应的系统参数不同时,本申请实施例中,第一集合对应的第一系统参数、与第二集合对应的第二系统参数,优选地,为终端设备和接入网设备之间进行相同数据传输类型时对应的系统参数。例如第一系统参数、第二系统参数,均为终端设备和接入网设备之间进行业务数据传输时对应的系统参数;或者第一系统参数、第二系统参数,均为终端设备和接入网设备进行控制数据传输时对应的系统参数。本申请实施例中,针对第一系统参数、第二系统参数,也可以有其他表示形式,不作具体限定。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, system parameters used for data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device may be different due to different data transmission types. For example, the system parameters corresponding to the control data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device are different from the system parameters corresponding to the service data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device. When the corresponding system parameters are different, in the embodiment of the present application, the first system parameter corresponding to the first set and the second system parameter corresponding to the second set are preferably the same between the terminal device and the access network device. The corresponding system parameter when the data transfer type. For example, the first system parameter and the second system parameter are system parameters corresponding to the service data transmission between the terminal device and the access network device; or the first system parameter and the second system parameter are terminal devices and accesses. The network device performs the corresponding system parameters when controlling data transmission. In the embodiment of the present application, other representations may be used for the first system parameter and the second system parameter, and are not specifically limited.
本申请的实施例还提供一种数据传输格式的传输方法,如图11所示,同样地,该传输方法可以应用于图1所示的网络架构,该方法中的接入网设备可以应用于图2的结构示意图,终端设备可以应用于图3的结构示意图。本申请实施例提供的方法以免许可频段的数据传输为例,但是本申请实施例提供的方法并不局限于免许可频段,该传输方法包括如下步骤:The embodiment of the present application further provides a data transmission format transmission method, as shown in FIG. 11 . Similarly, the transmission method can be applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , and the access network device in the method can be applied to 2 is a schematic structural diagram of the terminal device, which can be applied to the structure diagram of FIG. 3. The method provided by the embodiment of the present application is exemplified by the data transmission of the licensed band. However, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the unlicensed band, and the method includes the following steps:
步骤1101、与步骤401相同,这里不再赘述。Step 1101 is the same as step 401, and details are not described herein again.
步骤1102、接入网设备确定发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的起始位置。Step 1102: The access network device determines a starting position of the number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data.
步骤1103、接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数的起始位置。Step 1103: The access network device sends, to the terminal device, first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units for sending and/or receiving data by the access network device.
步骤1104、终端设备接收接入网设备发送的第一指示信息。Step 1104: The terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the access network device.
同样,在本申请实施例提供的方法中,步骤1101、1102的标号并不限定先后顺序,也就是说,步骤1101可以在步骤1102之前执行,也可以在步骤1102之后执行。同样,步骤1101可以在步骤1104之前执行,也可以在步骤1104之后执行。Similarly, in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the labels of the steps 1101 and 1102 do not limit the sequence, that is, the step 1101 may be performed before the step 1102 or may be performed after the step 1102. Likewise, step 1101 can be performed prior to step 1104 or after step 1104.
步骤1105、终端设备根据第一指示信息,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置。Step 1105: The terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, a starting position of the number of the time units.
在这里确定时间单元个数的起始位置的方法与前述实施例的方法相同,不再赘述。当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息和所述第一系统参数,确定所述时间单元的起始位置;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息和所述第二 系统参数,确定所述时间单元的起始位置。The method of determining the starting position of the number of time units here is the same as the method of the foregoing embodiment, and will not be described again. When the terminal device determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the terminal device determines, according to the second indication information and the first system parameter, The start position of the time unit; or, when the terminal device determines that the terminal device and the access network device use the second system parameter when performing data transmission, the terminal device is according to the second The indication information and the second system parameter determine a starting position of the time unit.
可选的,第一指示信息还用于指示接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,可以承载在下行公共控制信道中。Optionally, the first indication information is further used to indicate the number of time units for the access network device to send and/or receive data, and may be carried in the downlink common control channel.
与前述实施例相类似的是,在本申请实施例提供的传输方法中,当所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素。其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应,所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。该部分内容与前述实施例内容相类似,在此不再赘述。Similar to the foregoing embodiment, in the transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device and the access network device use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the time unit is used. The number is an element included in the first set; or, when the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is included in the second set element. The first set corresponds to the first system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter, the first set includes at least one M value, and the M is greater than N, The N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter. The content of this part is similar to the content of the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
通过本申请实施例提供的方法,可以得知,首先,无论接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用什么样的系统参数,接入网设备都可以使用第一指示信息,来指示发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,这就简化了数据传输格式(如SFI)的指示方法。其次,当第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔时,第一系统参数对应的第一集合中包括的时间单元个数取值与第二系统参数对应的第二集合中包括的时间单元个数取值满足如下关系:第一集合中包括至少一个M值,该M大于N,N为第二集合中的最大值。Through the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, it can be known that, first, regardless of the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device, the access network device can use the first indication information to indicate the sending. And / or the number of time units receiving data, which simplifies the indication of data transmission formats (such as SFI). Second, when the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter, the number of time units included in the first set corresponding to the first system parameter is corresponding to the second system parameter. The value of the number of time units included in the two sets satisfies the following relationship: the first set includes at least one M value, the M is greater than N, and N is the maximum value in the second set.
通过本申请实施例提供的方法,使得无论接入网设备和终端设备之间数据传输采用使用什么样的系统参数,第一指示信息所指示的多个时间单元对应的数据传输时长在不同的系统参数情况下都能达到相接近的结果,这尤其适用于免许可频段资源上的数据传输格式指示。例如,当确定终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的第一系统参数SCS为60kHz时,那么第一指示信息可以指示的最大长度为2 L×0.25ms(延续前面举例中参数的含义)。而采用本申请实施例提供的方法,第一指示信息可以指示的最大传输时长为2 L×1ms,该传输时长要大于第二系统参数对应的第二集合中的最大值2 L×0.25ms。因为在免许可频段资源上,由于受限于地域法规约束,接入网设备一旦竞争到免许可频段资源,在不需要重新评估该免许可频段资源的可用性情况下,发送和/或接收数据的传输时长是受限制的。该传输时长与数据传输采用哪种系统参数无关,例如该传输时长可以用MCOT表示,即第一指示信息指示的是接入网设备在MCOT内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中MCOT不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。为了便于描述,在本申请实施方式中,受限的传输时长使用MCOT来表示,但需要说明的是,受限的传输时长还可以有其他表示形式。因此,采用本申请实施例提供的方法,数据传输格式的指示也可以实现无论采用哪种系统参数,指示的时间单元对应的数据传输时长具有可比性,从而简化了免许可频段资源上的数据传输格式指示方法的设计。 The method provided by the embodiment of the present application is such that the data transmission duration corresponding to the multiple time units indicated by the first indication information is different in different systems regardless of the system parameters used for data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device. Similar results can be achieved in the case of parameters, which is especially applicable to data transmission format indications on unlicensed band resources. For example, when it is determined that the first system parameter SCS used by the terminal device and the access network device for data transmission is 60 kHz, then the maximum length that the first indication information can indicate is 2 L × 0.25 ms (continuing the meaning of the parameters in the previous example) ). With the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the maximum indication duration that the first indication information can indicate is 2 L × 1 ms, and the transmission duration is greater than the maximum value 2 L × 0.25 ms in the second set corresponding to the second system parameter. Because on the unlicensed band resources, the access network equipment, once bound to the unlicensed band resources, is subject to geographical regulations, and transmits and/or receives data without reassessing the availability of the unlicensed band resources. The transmission duration is limited. The transmission duration is independent of which system parameter the data transmission uses. For example, the transmission duration may be represented by MCOT, that is, the first indication information indicates the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data in the MCOT, where The MCOT is no larger than the single data transmission duration that is subject to regulatory restrictions on the unlicensed band resources. For ease of description, in the embodiment of the present application, the limited transmission duration is represented by MCOT, but it should be noted that the limited transmission duration may have other representations. Therefore, with the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the indication of the data transmission format can also realize that regardless of which system parameter is adopted, the data transmission duration corresponding to the indicated time unit is comparable, thereby simplifying data transmission on the unlicensed band resource. The format indicates the design of the method.
综上,采用本申请实施方式,可以在接入网设备和终端设备之间的数据传输使用不同系统参数时,指示可比或者相同的多个时间单元对应的传输时长,从而实现有效的数据传输格式指示,且简化了数据传输格式指示的设计方法。此外,在免许可频段 上使用该实施方式指示数据传输结构,还可以实现如下效果:In summary, when the data transmission between the access network device and the terminal device uses different system parameters, the transmission duration corresponding to multiple time units that are comparable or identical may be used to implement an effective data transmission format. Indicates and simplifies the design of the data transfer format indication. In addition, using the embodiment to indicate the data transmission structure on the unlicensed band can also achieve the following effects:
(1)终端设备在没有被调度的上行数据传输时间段内,可以不执行下行检测,从而达到了节电(power saving)的功效。(1) The terminal device may not perform downlink detection during the uplink data transmission period that is not scheduled, thereby achieving the power saving effect.
(2)在正确的下行数据时间段内,终端设备可以平均基于下行参考信号测量得到的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)。(2) During the correct downlink data period, the terminal device can average channel state information (CSI) based on the downlink reference signal measurement.
(3)便于终端设备确定先听后说(listen before talk,LBT)的类型。一般而言,LBT有两种方式,一种是带有随机回退的侦听机制,另外一种是无随机回退的侦听机制,即one shot侦听机制。一般而言,在MCOT内,设备可以采用one shot侦听机制,即假设接入网设备通过LBT竞争到免许可频段的使用权,那么在接入网设备竞争到资源之后的MCOT内,终端设备可以采用one shot侦听机制确定是否可以继续使用接入网设备竞争到的免许可频段资源。接入网设备在竞争到免许可频段资源之后,通过指示信息通知终端设备帧结构,可以只通知MCOT内包括的帧结构,如果终端设备被调度在该指示信息指示的上行数据传输时间范围内,则终端设备可以确定在传输数据之前采用one shot侦听机制。(3) It is convenient for the terminal device to determine the type of listen before talk (LBT). In general, there are two ways for LBT, one is a listening mechanism with random fallback, and the other is a listening mechanism without random backoff, that is, one shot listening mechanism. Generally, in the MCOT, the device can adopt a one shot listening mechanism, that is, if the access network device competes for the use right of the unlicensed band through the LBT, then the terminal device in the MCOT after the access network device competes for the resource The one shot listening mechanism can be used to determine whether the unlicensed band resources that the access network device competes for can continue to be used. After the access network device competes to the unlicensed band resource, the terminal device is notified of the frame structure by using the indication information, and only the frame structure included in the MCOT may be notified. If the terminal device is scheduled to be within the uplink data transmission time range indicated by the indication information, Then the terminal device can determine to adopt a one shot listening mechanism before transmitting the data.
本申请示例还提供一种装置(例如,集成电路、无线设备、电路模块等)用于实现上述方法。实现本文描述的功率跟踪器和/或供电发生器的装置可以是自立设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。设备可以是(i)自立的IC;(ii)具有一个或多个1C的集合,其可包括用于存储数据和/或指令的存储器IC;(iii)RFIC,诸如RF接收机或RF发射机/接收机;(iv)ASIC,诸如移动站调制解调器;(v)可嵌入在其他设备内的模块;(vi)接收机、蜂窝电话、无线设备、手持机、或者移动单元;(vii)其他等等。The present application examples also provide a device (eg, an integrated circuit, a wireless device, a circuit module, etc.) for implementing the above method. The means for implementing the power tracker and/or power generator described herein may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device. The device may be (i) a self-contained IC; (ii) a set having one or more 1Cs, which may include a memory IC for storing data and/or instructions; (iii) an RFIC, such as an RF receiver or RF transmitter (iv) an ASIC, such as a mobile station modem; (v) a module that can be embedded in other devices; (vi) a receiver, a cellular phone, a wireless device, a handset, or a mobile unit; (vii) other, etc. Wait.
本申请实施例提供的方法和装置,可以应用于终端设备或接入网设备(可以统称为无线设备)。该终端设备或接入网设备或无线设备可以包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、以及即时通信软件等应用。并且,在本申请实施例中,本申请实施例并不限定方法的执行主体的具体结构,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例的传输信号的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例的无线通信的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或接入网设备,或者,是终端设备或接入网设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。The method and apparatus provided by the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a terminal device or an access network device (which may be collectively referred to as a wireless device). The terminal device or access network device or wireless device may include a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. The hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also referred to as main memory). The operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system. The application layer includes applications such as browsers, contacts, word processing software, and instant messaging software. Moreover, in the embodiment of the present application, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method, as long as the transmission signal according to the embodiment of the present application can be executed by running a program that records the code of the method of the embodiment of the present application. The method can be communicated. For example, the execution body of the method for wireless communication in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal device or an access network device, or a function capable of calling a program and executing a program in the terminal device or the access network device. Module.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请实施例的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
此外,本申请实施例的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。Furthermore, various aspects or features of embodiments of the present application can be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" as used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or media. For example, a computer readable medium may include, but is not limited to, a magnetic storage device (eg, a hard disk, a floppy disk, or a magnetic tape, etc.), such as a compact disc (CD), a digital versatile disc (DVD). Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (eg, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drivers, etc.). Additionally, various storage media described herein can represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, without limitation, a wireless channel and various other mediums capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
应理解,在本申请实施例的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in various embodiments of the embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to this application. The implementation of the embodiments constitutes any limitation.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。A person skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质 上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者接入网设备等)执行本申请实施例各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present application, or the part contributing to the prior art or the part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium. The instructions include a plurality of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or an access network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .
以上所述,仅为本申请实施例的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。The foregoing is only a specific embodiment of the embodiments of the present application, but the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily adopt the technical scope disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. All changes or substitutions are contemplated to be within the scope of the embodiments of the present application.

Claims (36)

  1. 一种数据传输格式的传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting a data transmission format, comprising:
    终端设备确定所述终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的第一系统参数或第二系统参数;Determining, by the terminal device, a first system parameter or a second system parameter used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission;
    所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;Receiving, by the terminal device, first indication information that is sent by the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a number of time units of the access network device that send and/or receive data;
    所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息,确定所述时间单元个数;Determining, by the terminal device, the number of the time units according to the first indication information;
    其中,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;Wherein, when the terminal device determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or And when the terminal device determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is an element included in the second set;
    其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应;所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。The first set corresponds to the first system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; the first set includes at least one M value, and the M is greater than N, The N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 1 wherein
    所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100001
    的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;
    The first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100001
    The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , and w are positive integers, and i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w;
    或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比值为K的整数倍;Or the ratio between the at least one value in the first set and the at least one value in the second set is an integer multiple of K;
    其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。Where K is the ratio between the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,Method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that
    当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,When the terminal device determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission,
    所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息、所述第一系统参数以及所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数;Determining, by the terminal device, the number of the time units according to the first indication information, the first system parameter, and the second system parameter;
    或者,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数对应的传输时长。Or the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information and the second system parameter, a transmission duration corresponding to the number of the time units.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that
    所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置;The first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units;
    当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述第一系统参数,或者,根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置;When the terminal device determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the terminal device is configured according to the first indication information and the first system parameter. Or determining a starting position of the number of time units according to the first indication information and the second system parameter;
    或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第二系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置。Or, when the terminal device determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the terminal device is configured according to the first indication information and the second The system parameters determine the starting position of the number of time units.
  5. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that
    所述终端设备接收所述接入网设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置;Receiving, by the terminal device, second indication information that is sent by the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units;
    当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息和所述第一系统参数,或者,根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置;When the terminal device determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the terminal device is configured according to the second indication information and the first system parameter. Or determining a starting position of the number of time units according to the first indication information and the second system parameter;
    或者,当所述终端设备确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第二系统参数时,所述终端设备根据所述第二指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元的起始位置。Or, when the terminal device determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the terminal device is configured according to the second indication information and the second A system parameter that determines the starting position of the time unit.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息承载在相同的下行控制信道中。The method according to claim 5, wherein the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the first system parameter comprises a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration; the second system parameter comprises a subcarrier spacing SCS and / or time unit duration.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data, including:
    所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。The first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data within a preset time range, where the preset time range corresponds to a duration that is not greater than the unlicensed band resource. A single data transfer duration that is subject to regulatory constraints.
  10. 一种数据传输格式的传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for transmitting a data transmission format, the method comprising:
    接入网设备确定发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;The access network device determines the number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data;
    所述接入网设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;The access network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data;
    其中,当所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;Wherein, when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission as the first system parameter, the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or, when the terminal device When the second network parameter is used when the access network device performs data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the second set;
    其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应;所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。The first set corresponds to the first system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; the first set includes at least one M value, and the M is greater than N, The N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 10 wherein:
    所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100002
    的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;
    The first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100002
    The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , and w are positive integers, and i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w;
    或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比 值为K的整数倍;Or the ratio between the at least one value in the first set and the at least one value in the second set is an integer multiple of K;
    其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。Where K is the ratio between the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置。The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
  13. 根据权利要求10-12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 10-12, wherein
    所述接入网设备向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置。The access network device sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息承载在相同的下行控制信道中。The method according to claim 13, wherein the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
  15. 根据权利要求10-14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。The method according to any one of claims 10 to 14, wherein the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  16. 根据权利要求10-15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间。The method according to any one of claims 10-15, wherein the first system parameter comprises a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration; the second system parameter comprises a subcarrier spacing SCS and / or time unit duration.
  17. 根据权利要求10-16中任一项所述的方法,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-16, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units of the access network device to send and/or receive data, including:
    所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。The first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data within a preset time range, where the preset time range corresponds to a duration that is not greater than the unlicensed band resource. A single data transfer duration that is subject to regulatory constraints.
  18. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A terminal device, comprising:
    处理单元,用于确定所述终端设备和接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的第一系统参数或第二系统参数;a processing unit, configured to determine a first system parameter or a second system parameter used by the terminal device and the access network device to perform data transmission;
    收发单元,用于接收所述接入网设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;a transceiver unit, configured to receive first indication information that is sent by the access network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data;
    所述处理单元,还用于根据所述第一指示信息,确定所述时间单元个数;The processing unit is further configured to determine, according to the first indication information, the number of the time units;
    其中,当所述处理单元确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述处理单元确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;Wherein, when the processing unit determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or And when the processing unit determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the number of the time units is an element included in the second set;
    其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应;所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。The first set corresponds to the first system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; the first set includes at least one M value, and the M is greater than N, The N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的终端设备,其特征在于,The terminal device according to claim 18, characterized in that
    所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100003
    的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;
    The first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100003
    The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , and w are positive integers, and i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w;
    或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比值为K的整数倍;Or the ratio between the at least one value in the first set and the at least one value in the second set is an integer multiple of K;
    其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。Where K is the ratio between the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的终端设备,其特征在于,A terminal device according to claim 18 or 19, characterized in that
    当所述处理单元确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,When the processing unit determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission,
    所述处理单元根据所述第一指示信息、所述第一系统参数以及所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数;The processing unit determines the number of the time units according to the first indication information, the first system parameter, and the second system parameter;
    或者,所述处理单元根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数对应的传输时长。Alternatively, the processing unit determines, according to the first indication information and the second system parameter, a transmission duration corresponding to the number of the time units.
  21. 根据权利要求18-20中任一项所述的终端设备,其特征在于,A terminal device according to any one of claims 18 to 20, characterized in that
    所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置;The first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units;
    当所述处理单元确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,所述处理单元根据所述第一指示信息和所述第一系统参数,或者,根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置;When the processing unit determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the processing unit is configured according to the first indication information and the first system parameter Or determining a starting position of the number of time units according to the first indication information and the second system parameter;
    或者,当所述处理单元确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第二系统参数时,所述处理单元根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置。Or, when the processing unit determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the processing unit is configured according to the first indication information and the second The system parameters determine the starting position of the number of time units.
  22. 根据权利要求18-20中任一项所述的终端设备,其特征在于,A terminal device according to any one of claims 18 to 20, characterized in that
    所述收发单元接收所述接入网设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置;The transceiver unit receives the second indication information sent by the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units;
    当所述处理单元确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第一系统参数时,所述处理单元根据所述第二指示信息和所述第一系统参数,或者,根据所述第一指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元个数的起始位置;When the processing unit determines that the first system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the processing unit is configured according to the second indication information and the first system parameter Or determining a starting position of the number of time units according to the first indication information and the second system parameter;
    或者,当所述处理单元确定所述终端设备和所述接入网设备进行数据传输时使用的为所述第二系统参数时,所述处理单元根据所述第二指示信息和所述第二系统参数,确定所述时间单元的起始位置。Or, when the processing unit determines that the second system parameter is used when the terminal device and the access network device perform data transmission, the processing unit is configured according to the second indication information and the second A system parameter that determines the starting position of the time unit.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息承载在相同的下行控制信道中。The terminal device according to claim 22, wherein the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
  24. 根据权利要求18-23中任一项所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。The terminal device according to any one of claims 18 to 23, wherein the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  25. 根据权利要求18-24中任一项所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间。The terminal device according to any one of claims 18 to 24, wherein the first system parameter comprises a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration; the second system parameter comprises a subcarrier spacing SCS And / or time unit duration.
  26. 根据权利要求18-25中任一项所述的终端设备,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,包括:The terminal device according to any one of claims 18 to 25, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device transmits and/or receives data, including:
    所述第一指示信息用于指示所述接入网设备在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上 受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。The first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the access network device sends and/or receives data within a preset time range, where the preset time range corresponds to a duration that is not greater than the unlicensed band resource. A single data transfer duration that is subject to regulatory constraints.
  27. 一种接入网设备,其特征在于,包括:An access network device, comprising:
    处理单元,用于确定收发单元发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;a processing unit, configured to determine a number of time units for transmitting and/or receiving data by the transceiver unit;
    所述收发单元,还用于向终端设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述收发单元发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数;The transceiver unit is further configured to send the first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the transceiver unit sends and/or receives data;
    其中,当所述终端设备和所述收发单元进行数据传输时使用的为第一系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第一集合中包括的元素;或者,当所述终端设备和所述收发单元进行数据传输时使用的为第二系统参数时,所述时间单元个数为第二集合中包括的元素;Wherein, when the terminal device and the transceiver unit use the first system parameter when performing data transmission, the number of time units is an element included in the first set; or, when the terminal device and the When the transceiver unit performs data transmission for the second system parameter, the number of time units is an element included in the second set;
    其中,所述第一集合与所述第一系统参数相对应,所述第二集合与所述第二系统参数相对应;所述第一集合中包括至少一个M值,所述M大于N,所述N为所述第二集合中的最大值,且所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔小于所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔。The first set corresponds to the first system parameter, the second set corresponds to the second system parameter; the first set includes at least one M value, and the M is greater than N, The N is a maximum value in the second set, and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter is smaller than the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,The access network device of claim 27, wherein
    所述第一集合包括集合{a 1,a 2,…,a w},所述第二集合包括集合{b 1,b 2,…,b w},
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100004
    的值为K的整数倍,其中,a i、b i、w为正整数,i为大于0且小于等于w的自然数;
    The first set includes a set {a 1 , a 2 , . . . , a w }, and the second set includes a set {b 1 , b 2 , . . . , b w },
    Figure PCTCN2018123286-appb-100004
    The value is an integer multiple of K, where a i , b i , and w are positive integers, and i is a natural number greater than 0 and less than or equal to w;
    或者,所述第一集合中的至少一个数值与所述第二集合中的至少一个数值之间的比值为K的整数倍;Or the ratio between the at least one value in the first set and the at least one value in the second set is an integer multiple of K;
    其中,K为所述第一系统参数对应的子载波间隔与所述第二系统参数对应的子载波间隔之间的比值。Where K is the ratio between the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the first system parameter and the subcarrier spacing corresponding to the second system parameter.
  29. 根据权利要求27或28所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息还用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置。The access network device according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the first indication information is further used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
  30. 根据权利要求27-29中任一项所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,An access network device according to any one of claims 27-29, characterized in that
    所述收发单元向所述终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述时间单元个数的起始位置。The transceiver unit sends second indication information to the terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate a starting position of the number of time units.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息和所述第二指示信息承载在相同的下行控制信道中。The access network device according to claim 30, wherein the first indication information and the second indication information are carried in the same downlink control channel.
  32. 根据权利要求27-31中任一项所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息承载在下行公共控制信道中。The access network device according to any one of claims 27-31, wherein the first indication information is carried in a downlink common control channel.
  33. 根据权利要求27-32中任一项所述的接入网设备,其特征在于,所述第一系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间;所述第二系统参数包括子载波间隔SCS和/或时间单元持续时间。The access network device according to any one of claims 27-32, wherein the first system parameter comprises a subcarrier spacing SCS and/or a time unit duration; the second system parameter comprises a subcarrier Interval SCS and/or time unit duration.
  34. 根据权利要求27-33中任一项所述的接入网设备,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述收发单元发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,包括:The access network device according to any one of claims 27 to 33, wherein the first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the transceiver unit transmits and/or receives data, including:
    所述第一指示信息用于指示所述收发单元在预设时间范围内发送和/或接收数据的时间单元个数,其中所述预设时间范围对应的持续时间不大于免许可频段资源上受限于法规约束的单次数据传输时长。The first indication information is used to indicate the number of time units in which the transceiver unit transmits and/or receives data within a preset time range, wherein the preset time range corresponds to a duration that is not greater than an unlicensed band resource. Limited to a single data transfer duration subject to regulatory restrictions.
  35. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法。A computer readable storage medium for storing instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any of claims 1-9.
  36. 一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求10-17中任一项所述的方法。A computer readable storage medium for storing instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any of claims 10-17.
PCT/CN2018/123286 2017-12-29 2018-12-25 Method and device for transmitting data transmission format WO2019128949A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201711483895.9A CN109995462B (en) 2017-12-29 2017-12-29 Data transmission format transmission method and device
CN201711483895.9 2017-12-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019128949A1 true WO2019128949A1 (en) 2019-07-04

Family

ID=67063158

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2018/123286 WO2019128949A1 (en) 2017-12-29 2018-12-25 Method and device for transmitting data transmission format

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN109995462B (en)
WO (1) WO2019128949A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113826421A (en) * 2019-08-16 2021-12-21 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for activating terminal

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104205975A (en) * 2012-03-22 2014-12-10 夏普株式会社 Devices for enabling half-duplex communication
US20150180569A1 (en) * 2012-06-17 2015-06-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus for transceiving signals in accordance with a frame structure supportive of a plurality of carriers in a wireless communication system and method thereof
WO2017047973A1 (en) * 2015-09-17 2017-03-23 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for performing lbt process on multiple carriers in wireless access system supporting unlicensed band
CN107439048A (en) * 2015-01-30 2017-12-05 瑞典爱立信有限公司 The method of listem-before-talk and the UE and network node of correlation are provided

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102447546B (en) * 2010-09-30 2019-05-24 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of transmission method and equipment of data
WO2015163707A1 (en) * 2014-04-23 2015-10-29 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for transmitting and receiving data in wireless access system supporting unlicensed band
CN105991254A (en) * 2014-11-07 2016-10-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Signal sending method and device
WO2016090567A1 (en) * 2014-12-10 2016-06-16 华为技术有限公司 Signal transmitting and receiving method and device
WO2016161639A1 (en) * 2015-04-10 2016-10-13 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for determining channel state information
CN107317653B (en) * 2016-04-26 2022-06-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data transmission method and device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104205975A (en) * 2012-03-22 2014-12-10 夏普株式会社 Devices for enabling half-duplex communication
US20150180569A1 (en) * 2012-06-17 2015-06-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus for transceiving signals in accordance with a frame structure supportive of a plurality of carriers in a wireless communication system and method thereof
CN107439048A (en) * 2015-01-30 2017-12-05 瑞典爱立信有限公司 The method of listem-before-talk and the UE and network node of correlation are provided
WO2017047973A1 (en) * 2015-09-17 2017-03-23 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and device for performing lbt process on multiple carriers in wireless access system supporting unlicensed band

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI ET AL.: "NR frame structure on unlicensed bands", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 NR AD-HOC MEETING R1-1711466, 27 June 2017 (2017-06-27), XP051305600 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113826421A (en) * 2019-08-16 2021-12-21 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for activating terminal
CN113826421B (en) * 2019-08-16 2023-07-14 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for activating terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN109995462A (en) 2019-07-09
CN109995462B (en) 2021-10-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11665736B2 (en) Control channel position determining method, device, and processor-readable storage medium
EP3493501B1 (en) Signal sending method, network device and terminal device
CN107113832A (en) For first communication device, secondary communication device and the method therein of the instruction for sending and receiving subframe type respectively
US11647505B2 (en) Uplink signal transmission method and device
WO2020025042A1 (en) Resource configuration method and terminal device
WO2020200035A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink control information
WO2020025040A1 (en) Resource configuration method and terminal device
US20200045733A1 (en) Uplink Scheduling For NR-U
CN109891794B (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting feedback using two-stage uplink scheduling
EP3562070B1 (en) Data receiving and transmitting method and receiving and transmitting device
WO2021184354A1 (en) Information transmission method, apparatus and device, and storage medium
WO2020164635A1 (en) Initial signal transmission method and device
WO2019137266A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting indication information
WO2021134693A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN110769504B (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2019191971A1 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
WO2019128949A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting data transmission format
WO2022067703A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021098713A1 (en) Resource allocation method and related product
AU2018407271A1 (en) Channel transmission method and apparatus, and computer storage medium
JP7324294B2 (en) CONTROL CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD, DEVICE AND STORAGE MEDIUM
WO2022077509A1 (en) Control channel transmission method, terminal device and network device
WO2022022103A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting aperiodic sounding reference signal
RU2801816C1 (en) Method and device for data transmission
WO2022222106A1 (en) Method for transmitting physical sidelink feedback channel (psfch) and terminal device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18895792

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18895792

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1